JP2017086100A - Pinball game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a pinball game machine excellent in compatibility between a new model and an old model with respect to execution control of excessive winning performance.SOLUTION: In a pinball game machine provided with performance control means controlling performance in performance means on the basis of a control command from main control means, the main control means transmits a control command for normal winning that defines a first specific value in the case of a number is a maximum winning number to activate a big winning port closing condition or below, and transmits a control command for excessive winning that defines a second specific value when the number is over the maximum winning number. The performance control means executes big winning port normal winning performance as it receives the control command for normal winning, and executes excessive winning performance as it receives a control command for excessive winning.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

Description

  The present invention relates to a ball game machine.

  The ball game machine is a game for the purpose of acquiring more award balls, and it allows players who can acquire a large number of award balls at once by opening the big prize opening with a predetermined opening / closing pattern. An internal lottery (winning lottery) is performed to determine whether or not an advantageous winning game is generated, and on the effect display device, a graphic game image that fluctuates and stops a plurality of decorative symbols is displayed, and the result of the big winning lottery is reflected. It is configured to enjoy the game with the effect display.

  In this type of ball game machine, during the winning game, when the big prize opening is in the open state, when the prescribed number of winnings is reached, it is shifted to the closed state. Depending on the arrangement of the detection switches and the arrangement of the detection switches, there may be a case where a so-called “over prize” exceeding the prescribed number of prizes may occur. 2. Description of the Related Art A ball ball game machine configured to be able to execute an “over winning effect” that notifies a player of this over winning is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-24750 A

  The “over winning effect” as described above is used as an effect that gives the player a sense of superiority and superiority by notifying that the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening exceeds the specified number of winnings. In addition, during the hit game, it is excellent in the production effect as a production to entertain the player. Therefore, when developing a series model incorporating an over-winning effect while changing the prescribed number of winnings based on the old model, it is preferable that the old and new models have excellent compatibility.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a ball game machine that is excellent in compatibility between old and new models with respect to execution control of an over-winning effect.

  The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) A large winning means (special variable prize winning) formed in a game area and configured to execute a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a game ball and an open state in which a game ball can be easily entered. Device 42 or special variable winning device 52);
Main control means (main control unit 20) for comprehensively controlling game operations;
Production means (decoration lamp 45, speaker 46, liquid crystal display device 36, movable object 80, 98, etc.) for performing production related to the game,
Based on a control command from the main control means, an effect control means (effect control unit 24) for executing and controlling the effect in the effect means;
In a ball game machine equipped with
The main control means includes
Number-of-entry counting that counts the game balls that have entered the big winning means based on the detection information by the ball detecting means (for example, the right big prize opening sensor 52a) that detects the game balls that have entered the big winning means. Means (S053 in FIG. 8);
Lottery means (S059 in FIG. 8, S409 in FIG. 12, etc.) for executing a lottery regarding whether or not to win,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, the large winning means is set until the number of game balls counted by the number-of-balls counting means reaches the prescribed number of entered balls within a range not exceeding a predetermined prescribed time. Special game control means (S060 in FIG. 8, FIG. 16 (S505 to S509), FIG. 19 (S551, S553), FIG. 20 (S566 to S567), etc.) configured to be controllable to an open state,
Command transmission means (S565 in FIG. 20, S581 in FIG. 21) for transmitting a predetermined control command based on the counting result by the number-of-entry counting means,
The command transmission means includes
When the counting result is equal to or less than the prescribed number of balls, a normal winning control command (for example, a big winning mouth winning command 2) defining a first specific value is transmitted as the control command. When the result exceeds the prescribed number of winning balls, command transmitting means for transmitting an over winning control command (for example, a big winning mouth winning command 4) defining a second specific value as the control command (FIG. 22). S605 to S607),
The production control means includes
In response to the reception of the normal winning control command, the normal winning effect (for example, FIG. 33 (A)) for notifying the information on the occurrence of the number of pitches equal to or less than the specified number of pitches is normally controlled. Winning effect control means (FIG. 27A);
Upon receiving the over-winning control command, a special prize for executing and controlling an over-winning effect (for example, FIG. 33 (b)) for notifying information on the occurrence of an over-winning exceeding the prescribed number of balls. Production control means (FIG. 29A),
A ball game machine characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a ball game machine that is excellent in compatibility between old and new models with regard to the appearance control of the over winning effect.

It is a perspective view of the front side which shows the external appearance of the bullet ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the front side of the game board of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control apparatus of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the game state transition of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the prefetch notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 starting port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electrically-powered article management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory operation | movement start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during operation of the special electric accessory in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory operation | movement continuation determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening over winning number confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a “normal winning prize winning command receiving process (when receiving a big winning prize winning command 1)” in the command analysis processing in FIG. 24; FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a “normal winning prize winning command receiving process (when receiving a big winning prize winning command 2)” in the command analysis process in FIG. 24; FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing “OV winning prize winning command receiving process (when receiving a winning prize winning command 3)” in the command analysis process in FIG. 24; FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing “OV winning prize winning command receiving process (when receiving a winning prize winning command 4)” in the command analysis processing in FIG. 24; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the OV winning effect setting process in error in FIG. 29A. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the description of the over-winning effect with respect to the right big prize opening which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and a lower big prize opening over winning effect selection table. It is a figure which shows the description of the over winning effect with respect to the right big prize opening which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and a right big winning mouth over winning effect selection table. It is a figure which shows the right big winning opening over winning prize cumulative number display effect selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the error classification which may generate | occur | produce in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation | designated number table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description about the overwinning effect which concerns on the modification (5th Embodiment) of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening prize command for normal use and the big prize opening prize prize for OV winning which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process which concerns on the modification (3rd Embodiment) of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the large winning a prize mouth over winning number confirmation process which concerns on the 3rd modification of 1 embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the number-of-acquisition command and OV winning big winning opening prize command which concern on the modification (3rd Embodiment) of one Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a ball game machine according to the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
<1. Outline of Configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the outline | summary of a structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, the structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game is stored in a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted, and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is faced to the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting a transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When the key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the glass door 6 is locked to the front frame 2. When operated to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed below the glass door 6. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

  The upper tray unit 8 includes a ball removal button 14 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the pachinko hall island facility side. On the other hand, a ball lending button 11 for requesting payout of a game ball and a card return button 12 for requesting return of a valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

  In addition, the upper tray unit 8 is configured so that a player can operate it, and the “frame effect button 13 (used to bring about a change in a specific effect (for example, player participation type effect)) before and after the operation. The operation means for production) ”is provided. The frame effect button 13 can be operated (input reception is possible) when the built-in lamp is lit during a predetermined input reception period, and the effect changes when pressed when the built-in lamp is lit (during the input reception period). Can be brought. In addition, examples of the operation means for production include a button type, a jog dial type, a touch sensor type using a non-contact type sensor, and a touch panel type using a liquid crystal display device. There is no particular limitation as long as it can be used to give some kind of change to the production when the operation is performed (to bring about a change in the production before and after the operation). Further, the type and the number of installed operation means for production are not particularly limited.

  A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. Speakers 46 that produce sound effects (sound effects) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15. A plurality of decorative lamps 45 (full color LEDs) that provide a light effect by decoration of light are provided at appropriate positions on the glass door 6.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 that guides the launched game ball in a ring shape as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed. It is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

  In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) A liquid crystal display device 36 (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is provided that is capable of variable display and stop display of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and right symbol (corresponding to the right display area). It has been. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of an effect control unit 24 described later.

  Further, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and is a member that enables the flow path of game balls to be distributed to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls. A flow path distributing means), which is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 3a so that a game ball flow path is formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) of the game area 3a by the presence of the center decoration 48. ing. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center ornament 48 has a shape bulging slightly to the right.

  The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and forms a front mounting plate 48a that is fixed to the game board 3 by a fixing screw or the like, and forms an outer periphery of the center decoration 48, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. An armor frame portion 48b surrounding the screen is integrally provided. The armor frame portion 48b protrudes substantially from the front mounting plate 48a to the front side, and prevents the game ball from entering the inside, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side. The game balls driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left down flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 and the right down flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either.

  Although not shown in the figure, the center decoration 48 is provided with a game ball that is entered from a entrance (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame 48b at the front lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the horizontal direction. The stage is provided so that it can freely roll and drop from the center in the left-right direction (starting port guide path) or from both the left and right sides. Further, the center decoration 48 is provided with a plurality of decorative lamps with full-color LEDs that provide a light effect at appropriate positions.

  In the area of the game board 3, a plurality of movable body accessories that provide visual effects are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of the game ball. In the present embodiment, a first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory: 80, 80a) is arranged at the upper right side in the center ornament 48, that is, at a position that does not disturb the flow of the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c, A second movable body accessory (flower type accessory 98) is disposed on the lower right side. As will be described in detail later, these movable body accessories are configured to be operable in a predetermined operation mode during a hit game or a symbol variation display game.

  The first movable body accessory is composed of a clock panel portion including a number display portion 80 which is divided into twelve number sectors 80a with numerals of Roman letters 'I'-'XII', and on the number display portion 80. And a clock hand 97 composed of a short hand and a long hand that can indicate the hour and minute, and is configured as a clock-type accessory as a whole. The number display unit 80 has a full color LED on the back side or inside for each sector partition location (the number sector 80a of Roman letters 'I'-'XII') indicated by the short hand, or the number sector 80a itself is composed of a full color LED. The number sectors 80a with the Roman letters 'I'-'XII' can individually emit light in different colors.

  The second movable body accessory is a flower shape in which a flower crown is arranged around a flower heart and a flower cover is doubled by arranging a bud on the outer periphery. It consists of an accessory 98. The flower-shaped accessory 98 has a translucent flower heart and petal portion illuminated from behind by a lamp or a full-color LED and shines beautifully. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, only the petal portion or the flower heart and petal portion is obtained each time. Is configured to move back and forth, right and left, up and down or circumferentially and return to the original state, that is, inching.

  In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section, and a 7-segment display (with dots) is started with the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) which are arranged side by side in correspondence with the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of “special symbol” expressed by 7 segments (variation display operation in which variation start and variation stop are set as one set). It has become. Note that the liquid crystal display device 36 described above displays the decorative symbols by the image in a synchronized manner with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in time. (The details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  The various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39 (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged. In this normal symbol display device 39, the normal symbol change display operation expressed by two LEDs (for example, seesaw is alternately turned on and off alternately, and it is determined whether it is stopped by either side being lit). As a result, the normal symbol variation display game is executed.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawings, each function display unit is provided with a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) composed of a 7-segment display (with dots). The combination was called the display of the number of balls with special action 1, the number of balls with special action 2, the number of balls with special action 2, the variable time shortening function is active (short time), and the high probability state (high probability) This is because it is an on-hold / short-time / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions called status notification. The various function display units are provided with a round number display device (round notification LED) including a plurality of LEDs. This number-of-rounds display device functions as a “specified number of rounds notification means” for notifying a specified number of rounds related to a big hit (details of “big hit” will be described later). For example, a combination of lighting / extinguishing states of three LEDs The specified number of rounds is notified.

  Below the center decoration 48, an upper start port 34 (first special symbol start port: first starter) and a lower start port 35 (second special symbol starter: second starter) are provided. The normal variation winning device 41 is provided at the top and bottom, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start opening sensor 34a and lower start opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the game ball are formed inside each. ing.

  The upper start port 34 which is the first special symbol start port is a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 1”) in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). This is a prize winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the variable display operation in some cases, which is abbreviated as “Special Figure 1”, and does not have a starting opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). It is configured as a winning device. In the present embodiment, a game ball dropping direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a is operated to the upper start port 34 to the left-down flow path 3b. The game balls that have flowed down the game are easy to win, whereas the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c have a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to win.

  The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variation type winning device that can vary the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by means of the starting port opening / closing means, and specifically, a second special symbol starting port. A certain lower starting port 35 is configured as a so-called “electric tulip type” winning device including a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that can be opened or enlarged. The lower start opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 2”) in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). The award area relating to the start condition of the variable display operation of the variable display operation of the lower start opening 35 is determined according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable blade piece 47. It is converted into an open state (easy winning state) that facilitates winning and a closed state (difficulty state that makes winning difficult) or impossible to win than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable blade piece 47 is inactive, a closed state (a state in which a prize cannot be awarded) in which a prize cannot be awarded to the lower start port 35 is maintained.

  Below the normal variable winning device 41 (lower start opening 35), a special variable winning device 42 (first first prize winning device 42) configured such that the lower large winning port 40 (first large winning port) can be opened or expanded by the open door 42b. A special variable winning device) is provided, and a lower large winning opening sensor 42a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball is formed therein.

  Further, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are four general winning openings 43 on the left side and one on the right side, four in total. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  Further, a normal symbol start opening 37 including a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally right above the normal variation winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. . The normal symbol start port 37 (third starter) is a winning port related to the normal symbol variation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39, and a normal symbol start port for detecting a passing game ball is provided therein. A sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be formed only in the left flow path 3b, or may be formed in each of both flow paths.

  In the middle of the path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow down path 3c, the right big winning port 50 (second big winning port) is opened by the retractable opening door 52b. A special variable winning device 52 (second special variable winning device) configured to be expandable is provided, and a right big prize opening sensor 52a for detecting a game ball that has entered the right big prize opening 50 is provided therein. (See FIG. 3).

  Around the right big prize opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. ing. And if the right big prize opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (large prize opening closed state), the downstream guide part of the right flow path 3c is formed by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55. A part of (upper side 55a) is formed. Further, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, the flow path correction is made almost parallel to the flow direction of the game ball in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely, in the game area above the right big prize opening 50. A board 51 d is provided so as to work to bring the game ball flowing down toward the right big prize opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the right grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, so that the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the right big winning opening 50 (downward). . At this time, if the right big prize opening 50 is covered with the retractable open door 52b (the big prize opening closed state), the game ball rolls over the predetermined arrangement (not shown). Are guided in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower start opening 35) and the special variable winning device 42 (lower large winning port 40). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 or the lower large winning opening 40 is in a winable state (open state), a game ball can win the winning opening. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the right big prize opening 50 is open (right big prize opening state), the game ball is guided into the right big prize opening 50.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided to the mouth 34 side or is not guided. Therefore, if the right big prize opening 50 is in the closed state, it is difficult or impossible to win the start openings 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 is operated. .

  When the winning means described above belong to which of the left and right flow paths, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can be won, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b The upper start opening 34, the lower start opening 35, the lower large prize opening 40, and the three general winning openings 43 on the left side include the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening, and the winning means belonging to the right flow path 3c. 35, a normal symbol start opening 37, a right large winning opening 50, a lower large winning opening 40, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

  Note that the lower start port 35 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c as long as the movable blade piece 47 is in the open state (start port open state). It is possible. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 has the operating condition for the passage (winning) of the game ball to the normal symbol start opening 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, it is substantially the right flow It can be said that it belongs only to the path 3c.

  In addition, the upper start port 34 generally belongs only to the left flow down route 3b or the left flow down route 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball from the right flow down route 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nail and other game parts in the game area 3a is the same as that of the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b (including the game ball that has passed through the stage of the center decoration 48). However, the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c are arranged so as to form a guide path that makes it difficult or impossible to guide the game ball to the upper start opening 34.

  Further, the lower large winning opening 40 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c, and it is possible to win from any of the left and right flow down paths. However, the right big winning opening 50 belongs only to the left flow path 3b, and only a game ball from the right flow path 3c can win.

Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the lower large winning opening 40, the right large winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 is arranged in the game area 3a. functions as prize means, above starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the inferior vena winning hole sensor 42a, detection of such right winning opening sensor 52a or the general winning hole sensor 43a, The switch (winning detection switch) functions as a winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means. The winning detection switch can be constituted by a non-contact switch such as a photo switch or a proximity switch, or a contact switch such as a micro switch.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning holes provided in the gaming area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of winning balls per winning ball (for example, 3 for the upper starting hole 34 or the lower starting hole 35, 13 for the lower large winning opening 40 or the right large winning opening 50, and 10 for the general winning opening 43). The game ball is paid out from the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3). Note that the game balls that have not won each winning opening are discharged from the gaming area 3 a through the out opening 49. Here, “winning” is not a structure in which a winning opening takes a game ball inside, or a winning opening takes a game ball inside, but a winning opening made of a pass-through gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning slot, a winning prize is displayed at the winning slot. It is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to the winning is also referred to as “winning ball”.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment receives an effect control command from the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the main control unit 20 that is responsible for overall game operation control, and receives images, light, and sound. A production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board) 24 for overall control of production operation control (production appearance control for production means), a payout control board 29 for performing prize ball payout control, and an external power supply ( A power supply control board (not shown) that generates and supplies power necessary for the gaming machine from a not-shown machine is mainly configured. In addition, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. In FIG. 3, the power supply route is omitted.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), a ROM 202 (main control ROM), and a RAM 203 (main control RAM). As a whole, a microcomputer (equivalent to a Z80 system) ).

  The CPU 201 is a CPU of Z80 (manufactured by Zylog Corporation or an equivalent thereof). Z80 is a CPU with a data bus of 8 bits and an address bus of 16 bits, but does not require a large memory space, and it is ideal for controlling pachinko machines that do not require high-speed processing or complicated numerical operation processing. It is. The CPU 201 also includes a plurality of types of registers for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing.

  The ROM 202 functions as storage means (main control side storage means) for storing game data related to game operation control, and stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. ing. The RAM 203 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter used for a predetermined lottery (for example, a variation pattern lottery related to a special symbol), and functions as a random number generation unit that generates random numbers in software.

  Although not shown in the figure, the main control unit 20 provides a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit), which gives a periodic interrupt, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) and a time measurement function to the Z80 system, and a CPU. It also has an interrupt controller circuit, a counter circuit, etc. that exhibit an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal. The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number within a certain range in hardware, and a sampling circuit that samples a random value from the random number generation circuit at a predetermined timing, and as a whole a 16-bit counter work. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, thereby obtaining the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random value (random number size: 65536), and winning the random value Use for lottery.

  The main control unit 20 detects the passage of the upper start opening 34a for detecting the winning to the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening sensor 35a for detecting the winning to the lower start opening 35, and the normal symbol start opening 37. A normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a lower large winning opening sensor 42a for detecting a winning at the lower large winning opening 40, a right large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting a winning at the right large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43. A general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning is connected to the fraud detection sensor 99, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these.

  The fraud detection sensor 99 functions as fraud detection means for detecting fraudulent acts (got acts) on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and includes various sensors such as a vibration sensor, a magnetic sensor, and a radio wave sensor (not shown). Can do.

  The vibration sensor functions as a vibration detection unit, and detects a vibration state (unjust vibration) given to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The magnetic sensor functions as a magnetic detection means, and detects a change in the magnetic field when a magnet or the like is brought close to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined area of the game board 3). The radio wave sensor functions as radio wave detection means and detects radio waves (illegal radio waves) irradiated to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main control unit 20 includes abnormality determination means for determining whether an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine based on the detection information from the fraud detection sensor 99.

  In general, these fraud detection sensors are attached according to the model in consideration of the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine and the structure of the game board surface. Based on the detection signal from the fraud detection sensor 99, the main control unit 20 monitors whether or not there has been a fraudulent action, and executes a predetermined error process when it is determined that the fraudulent act has occurred. ing. In addition, what kind of state is determined to be determined to be fraudulent using various sensors can be appropriately determined according to the model and game playability. In addition, each of the above-described sensors is arranged at a proper position of the gaming machine so that the illegal act can be effectively detected in order to protect a gaming part or the like where the illegal action is expected to be executed.

  There are the following types of fraud. As a fraudulent act related to vibration (so-called “dokkigoto”), for example, a game ball is given to a specific winning opening or winning area (a winning opening or winning area that affects the profit state) by applying vibration to the gaming machine from the outside. For example, an illegal act of forcibly making a prize (pass).

  In addition, as an illegal act related to a magnet (magnetic force) (so-called “magnet goto”), for example, a magnet is used to induce a game ball to win (pass) a game ball in a specific winning opening or a winning area. By using a gauge arrangement, a plurality of game balls (so-called “grape” state) are created to facilitate the winning (passing) of game balls at a specific winning opening or a winning area, Examples include cheating such as actuating.

  In addition, as illegal acts related to radio waves (so-called “radio waves”), for example, illicit radio waves are applied to gaming machines and sensor switches are malfunctioned to obtain prize balls illegally, or game operations are malfunctioned. For example, illegal acts such as giving and forcibly hitting a big hit directly.

  In order to detect fraud as described above, for example, in the case of determining fraud by a vibration sensor, it is determined whether or not the vibration detected by the vibration sensor is equal to or higher than a reference value (predetermined level). When the value is equal to or greater than the reference value, it can be determined that there has been a fraudulent act due to vibrations such as pounding. In this case, in order to more accurately detect whether the vibration is due to fraud or not, it is fraudulent when a vibration of a predetermined level or more is detected a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). Can be determined. In addition, when vibration of a predetermined level or more is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the vibration sensor, it can be determined that there is an illegal act due to the vibration. In this case, in order to more accurately detect whether the vibration is due to fraud or not, vibration with a short time width that is not determined as fraud is detected by the vibration sensor. It is also possible to determine that it is an improper act when it is detected intermittently within a time exceeding the predetermined time, and the detected cumulative number reaches a predetermined value.

  Further, in the case where fraud is determined by the magnetic sensor, for example, when the magnetic sensor detects a change state of a predetermined magnetic field (for example, the magnetic sensor detects a magnetic state, and a predetermined tolerance is determined based on a predetermined reference value). If it is detected that the range is out of), or if the change state is detected continuously for a predetermined time, it can be determined that there has been an improper act by the magnet.

  In addition, when a fraudulent act is determined by the radio wave sensor, for example, when a radio wave having a specific frequency or a specific frequency band is detected, it can be determined that there has been a fraudulent act due to the illegal radio wave. In addition, in order to prevent false detection, if the number of times of detection is detected a predetermined number of times (for example, two times or more), or if the detection time is detected for a predetermined period of time, fraudulent acts caused by unauthorized radio waves It can be determined that there was.

  The determination as to whether or not the fraud detection is performed by each of the fraud detection sensors is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that can detect a phenomenon that is assumed to be a fraud based on the configuration of the gaming machine, game playability, and the like.

  The main control unit 20 also includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 and a large winning opening solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 42b of the lower large winning opening 40. 42c and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening / closing of the open door 52b of the right large winning opening 50 are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling them.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbol. The main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39, and can transmit a control signal for display control of the normal symbol.

  In addition, a composite display device (not shown) is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of various information displayed on the main display unit. In addition, a round number display device is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of a specified number of rounds by jackpot.

  Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a frame external concentration terminal board 21, and the main control unit 20 provides information on the game progress (for example, jackpot winning information, prize ball number information, symbol variation display game execution number information, etc.). Can be transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21. The hall computer HC is a management computer that manages the operating status of pachinko hall gaming machines based on information sent from the main controller 20, and is arranged outside the gaming machine.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a payout control board (payout control part) 29. The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control part) 28 for controlling the launching device 32, and a game ball payout. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19. The main control unit 20 can send a payout control command (a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29.

  The main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information related to the special symbol variation display game and information related to errors to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. Such a production control command from the main control unit 20 is produced by one-way communication in order to prevent an illegal signal due to an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 20 via the production control unit 24. It is transmitted to the control unit 24.

  The payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is equipped with a microprocessor having a payout control CPU, and a payout control ROM storing a control program describing a payout control procedure for game balls, and a payout in which a work area is formed A control RAM is mounted to constitute a one-chip microcomputer. The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, award ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and transmission of a payout state signal to the main control unit 20. Etc.

  On the payout control board 29, a full detection sensor 60 (a detection sensor for detecting a storage state of game balls in the ball tray (in this embodiment, the upper tray 9)) that detects that the upper tray 9 is full of game balls, A front door opening sensor 61 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting the open state of the front frame 2 and / or the front operation panel 7) and the game ball payout device 19 are connected.

  The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply replenishment detection sensor 72 for detecting insufficient supply of game balls, and a ball counting sensor 73 for detecting game balls to be paid out (award balls). These detection signals can be received. The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 74 that drives a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out game balls. The payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 74. The control signal can be transmitted.

  In addition, the payout control board 29 is connected to the main control unit 20 based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor, the front door opening sensor, the replenishment detection sensor, or the ball counting sensor. Open / close state signal, full detection signal, replenishment out signal, payout shortage error signal, prize ball counting signal, and other payout state signals can be transmitted. Based on this payout state signal, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not the game ball payout device 19 is functioning normally (for example, a prize ball payout failure (payout error), and the upper tray 9 is full of game balls. Whether it is or not is monitored.

  Further, a discharge control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29 so that a discharge control signal can be transmitted to the discharge control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization to a launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the launch control signal, and realizes a game ball launch operation by operating the launch operation handle 15. .

(2-3. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 includes a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), and is mainly configured by a microcomputer with a ROM 242 (production control ROM) and a RAM 243 (production control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a sound source IC, CTC, and timer interrupt, a counter circuit for generating random numbers in hardware, and the like are provided. The ROM 242 functions as storage means (effect control side storage means) for storing game data related to effect operation control, and stores various data necessary for effect operation control in addition to the effect control program in which the effect control procedure is described. Has been. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for producing an effect is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter for effect lottery random numbers used for effect lottery, and functions as a random number generating means for generating random numbers in software.

  The main roles of the production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection of production based on production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, decorative lamps. 45, the number display portion 80 of the clock-type accessory, and the light emission control of various LEDs (production LED: not shown) disposed in the game machine, the movable hand of the clock hand 97 and the flower-type accessory 98 It is the operation control of things.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is an image ROM storing VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. A liquid crystal control ROM that stores the described program and various data necessary for display control thereof, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory are mainly configured.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a frame effect button 13 that can be operated by the player, and the effect control unit 24 can receive an operation detection signal from the frame effect button 13.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a light display control unit for a light display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45, a number display unit 80, an LED disposed at an appropriate place, and a speaker 46 in order to perform a light effect and a sound effect. A sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a and a drive control unit for the movable body accessory motors 97a and 98a for operating various accessories (the clock hand 97 of the clock-type accessory and the flower-type accessory 98) (Motor drive circuit: not shown). The effect control unit 24 can transmit control signals related to the effect means to these control units.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection switch 97b for the clock hand 97 and a position detection switch 98b for the flower-shaped accessory 98, and the effect control unit 24 can receive detection signals from these. . The production control unit 24 grasps the current position from the origin position (initial position) of the movable body accessory based on the detection signals from the position detection switches 97b and 98b, and executes and controls the operation of the movable body accessory. Also, the malfunction of the movable body accessory (whether or not it is a normal operation (for example, whether or not it has correctly returned to the original position after the operation)) is monitored.

  The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and controls various effect means at a necessary timing. To do. Thereby, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking driving of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized. The production of “production scenarios” in a broad sense is realized.

  The effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and an event (EVENT) of 1-byte length. In order to distinguish MODE from EVENT, MODE Bit 7 is Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time elapses from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after the elapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second time of the strobe signal is transmitted after the elapse of the predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (production control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process executed periodically). Even in such a case, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol change display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, the main control unit 20 The “big hit lottery” is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner to start the special symbol variation display game. Derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning to the upper start opening 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning to the lower start opening 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the big hit lottery result regarding the upper start port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result regarding the lower start port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that a game ball has entered the upper start opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the lower start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol variation display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game in the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, if the big win lottery result is “big hit” after the predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the predetermined “big hit” is given. In this mode, in other cases, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined “losing” mode, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived and displayed.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, “special symbol 1” and “special symbol 2” are simply referred to as “special symbols” (sometimes abbreviated as “special symbol”), and “special symbol variation display game 1” and “special symbol” The symbol variation display game 2 ”is simply referred to as“ special symbol variation display game ”.

  In addition, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying the decorative symbol (proactive game symbol) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Various developments are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorated design is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning ornamental symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

  Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is “big hit” (when the big hit lottery result is “hit”), the decoration symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. In the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol is a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right”. In each display area of “”, the display pattern in which the decorative symbol reflects “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” display areas, the three decorative symbols are “7”, “7”, “ 7 ”display state).

  When this “big hit” is reached, specifically, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated accordingly. As a result, the symbol pattern of “hit” is derived and displayed. After that, the lower large prize opening solenoid 42c (see FIG. 3) provided in the special variable prize winning device 42 is operated to open / close the open door 42b in a predetermined operation pattern, and thereby the lower big prize opening 40 is opened / closed. Alternatively, the special prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable prize winning device 52 is operated to open and close the open door 52b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby opening and closing the right big prize opening 50, and the normal game A special gaming state (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the state occurs. In this jackpot game, the number of game balls won in the big prize opening (the winning ball in the big prize opening) until the opening time of the big prize opening reaches a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) or Reaches a predetermined number (maximum number of winnings: the number of winning balls (winning number) allowed for an expanded winning opening is increased, for example, 9). Up to a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 16 rounds) where the winning area is opened or expanded, and the big winning opening is closed when either of these conditions is met. Repeated. The conditions for closing the lower grand prize opening 40 and the right major prize opening 50 are not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the big prize opening, or the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening. It may be based on only.

  When the jackpot game is started, an opening effect for informing that the jackpot is started is performed first, and after the opening effect is finished, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. Then, after the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending effect for notifying that the jackpot is finished is performed, and thereby the jackpot game is finished. That is, the jackpot game is roughly composed of game periods of an opening effect, a round game, and an ending effect. However, the round game execution period excluding the opening effect period and the ending effect period in the closed state of the big prize opening may be regarded as a big hit game period.

  Regarding the information necessary for the execution of the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 is based on the fact that a game ball enters (wins) the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35. Whether the game is detected by the upper start sensor 34a or the lower start sensor 35a and the start condition (the start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, whether the game is “big hit” or “lost” 'Lottery lottery (win / fail type lottery)', and if it is a 'big hit', the big hit type is drawn, and if it is 'losing', the lottery type is drawn. A big hit lottery including 'is performed, and based on the lottery result information, a variation pattern of the special symbol and a special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a “variation pattern designation command” including at least a special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the special symbol variation time) is provided to the effect control unit 24 side. Send. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, in order to enrich the production variations, a “decorative design designation command” including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information (information on the hit type)) is also transmitted to the production control unit 24. ing.

  The special symbol variation pattern information may include information for designating the occurrence of a specific notice effect (a reach effect via a reach state, which will be described later, or a pseudo-continuous effect with a pseudo-variable display operation). To explain in detail, the variation patterns of special symbols are roughly divided into “hit variation pattern” in the case of winning and “losing variation pattern” in the case of loss, according to the big hit lottery result information. For example, a variation pattern for designating reach production (for example, a reach variation pattern, a reach variation pattern with pseudo-continuous (described below)), or a non-reach production design that does not specify the occurrence of reach production. Fluctuation patterns (for example, a normal fluctuation pattern, a normal fluctuation pattern with pseudo-continuations, etc.) are included. Regarding the variation time for each variation pattern, basically, the reach variation pattern is a variation pattern that specifies an effect that makes you expect to win big hits. Also has a long variation time.

  The effect control unit 24 performs time series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. Deciding the contents to be developed (effect scenario) and the decoration pattern (decoration stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the decoration pattern fluctuation display game by changing the decoration symbols according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbols Is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols by the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game are in progress. Are substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED, etc. are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the passing (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37, “main lottery” is performed by the random number lottery in the main control unit 20. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39 to start the normal symbol variation display game, and after a certain period of time, the result is a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol fluctuation display game is “per assist”, the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39 is turned on in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are in a lighting state, or “O” and “ The display is stopped when the “○” side LED among the LEDs representing “x” is in a lighting state.

  When this "subsidiary hit" is reached, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, thereby opening the movable blade 47 in a reverse "C" shape and opening the lower start port 35. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to enter a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (opening opening state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as “general power open game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this open electric game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 won the open time of the lower start opening 35 until a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses or the lower start opening 35 was won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when one of these conditions is satisfied, the lower start opening 35 is closed a predetermined number of times (for example, , Up to 2 times). The condition for closing the lower start opening 35 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the lower start opening, or only based on the number of game balls won in the lower start opening. Also good.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the regular symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the open-circuit game, the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35 or the normal symbol start port 37, when a winning occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start sensor 34a, the lower start sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied As a data relating to the right to start the variable display game, except for the data related to the variable display, the maximum storage number (for example, a maximum of four) which is a predetermined upper limit value is reserved and stored. . The on-hold hold data that has not been subjected to the symbol variation display operation or a game ball related to the hold data is also referred to as an “operation hold ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a holding provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the indicator.

  Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls relating to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are held as the fixed number of times of change of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reserve memory number) of the number of the operation reservation balls regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited, and the maximum reserve memory number of each symbol may be different (for example, The maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 1 side is 4, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 2 side is 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the normal symbol side is 6, etc.). Moreover, regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the symbol side where the profit obtained by the big hit lottery is relatively high may be set. In the present embodiment, since the jackpot lottery related to the special symbol 2 can obtain a jackpot type that is relatively profitable for the player, for example, the maximum number of reserved memory on the special symbol 1 side is two, the special symbol 2 side The maximum number of reserved memories may be set to 4 more than that.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the jackpot that is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a “probability variation (hereinafter, abbreviated as“ probability variation ”) function” that the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) serves as a function unit. There are two types, a probability changing function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol probability changing function”) and a probability changing function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol probability changing function”).

  The special symbol probability changing function changes the probability of winning a lottery from a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/3 of 19.9). Is a function that generates an advantageous “high probability state”. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the big hit lottery probability is high, so that the big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming state expected by the player is a gaming state in which this special symbol probability changing function is operating. The details of the operation start condition and the operation end condition of the special symbol probability changing function will be described later.

  The normal symbol probability changing function changes the low probability (for example, 1/256) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) that the lottery probability per auxiliary is a predetermined probability (ordinary probability), so that it is more than the normal gaming state. This is a function for generating an advantageous “probability change state per auxiliary”. Under the game state in which this normal symbol probability changing function is operating (probability per assist change state), since the lottery probability per auxiliary is in a high probability state, auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and open-game games frequently occur. Thus, the operating rate is improved so that the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol probability changing function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time-shortening function described later, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time-shortening function. This is the same condition as the operation end condition.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a “variable time reduction (hereinafter referred to as“ time reduction ”) function” that the main control unit 20 takes on as a function unit. There are two types of time-shortening functions relating to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol time-shortening functions”) and time-shortening functions relating to ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol time-shortening functions”).

  The special symbol time reduction function shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed (average fluctuation time of the special symbol)). This is a function that generates a special symbol short-time state. Under the gaming state in which the special symbol time reduction function is activated (special symbol short time state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the variation without reach) Is reduced from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), a lottery number improvement state is achieved in which the number of big lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls. This is due to the control process.

  The normal symbol time shortening function is the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of normal symbols to the final display (average fluctuation time of normal symbols)) This is a function to generate a shortened "normal symbol time short state". Under the game state in which the normal symbol short-time function is activated (normal symbol short-time state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 10 seconds to 1 second). In other words, the number of lotteries is improved so that the number of lotteries per auxiliary time per unit time is improved as compared with the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the normal symbol short-time state does not occur. This is due to the control process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol short-time function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol short-time function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol short-time function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as a function unit.

  The open extension function is a function for generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time and the number of opening times of the movable blade piece 47) of the movable blade piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 is extended. is there. This open extended state is referred to as a so-called “electric chew support state”. Under the gaming state (open extended state) in which the open extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, for example. The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from once (when the opening extension function is not in operation) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved so that the operating rate is improved. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same condition as the operation start condition of the special symbol time shortening function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time shortening function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions. Therefore, during the open extended state, the normal symbol probability changing function and the normal symbol time-shortening function also act, so that a gaming state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved occurs.

  By operating one or more types of the functions as described above, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Here, in this embodiment, the operation start conditions of the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function, so each function operates at the same opportunity. Will do. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function, the special symbol time shortening function, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time shortening function, and the open extension function are referred to as “probability changing state”. A gaming state from which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is referred to as a “short-time state”, and a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability changing function is activated is referred to as a “latent probability varying state (latent probability or latent probability state)”, and not all functions are in operation. The (non-operating) state is referred to as “normal gaming state”. Therefore, when paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, if the gaming state is “short-time state” or “normal gaming state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “low probability state” and the gaming state becomes “latency probability”. In the case of “state” or “probability change state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. In addition, a winning game is generated when the big prize opening is opened and closed during the winning, but all the functions are deactivated and basically placed under the same gaming state as the normal gaming state.

(3-2-1. High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function. Will operate at the same opportunity. However, when attention is paid to the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time-shortening function, and the open extension function, respectively, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operating rate of the movable blade piece 47 is improved. Since the operating rate is improved and the winning frequency at the lower start opening 35 is increased, the gaming condition is that the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the big win lottery result is higher than the normal gaming state. "Base gaming state (starting condition improved state)". The “high base gaming state” here refers to a gaming state when a function relating to a normal symbol is activated, and a function relating to a special symbol, that is, at least one of a special symbol probability changing function and a special symbol time-shortening function is activated. It is different from the game state when doing.

  On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol short-time function) individually, when the above special symbol probability changing function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state” which is higher than the normal gaming state. When the special symbol short-time function is activated, the special symbol variation display game has a “special symbol short-time state” in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is earlier than the normal gaming state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the “high base gaming state” in which the starting frequency of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, as an example of the “high base game state”, an electric chew support state to which at least an extension function is provided is treated as a “high base game state”. Under the electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normally variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Therefore, the game state is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the electronic chew support state is not set (low base game state). Focusing on the presence / absence of the electric chew support state, if the game state is “normal game state” or “latent probability state”, “no electric chew support state” (hereinafter referred to as “no electric support state”) is obtained. When the game state is “time-short state” or “probability change state”, the state is “electric chew support state present (hereinafter referred to as“ electric support state ”)”. In addition, the gaming state that pays attention to the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support Is referred to as “internal gaming state”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the internal game state such as the normal game state, the latent state, the short time state, the probability change state, etc., one internal game state is further classified and managed. doing. For example, the above “normal game state (low probability / no electric support)” includes a plurality of types of normal game states such as “normal state” and “CHANCE ZONE state (hereinafter abbreviated as“ CZ ”)”. Managed as a state.

  As a result, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability or the presence or absence of electric support, etc. In the case of paying attention to the “game state”, the “normal state” and “CZ (internal game state is the normal game state CZ: CZ (normal)) regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol even though it is the same“ normal game state ”. ) ”(A variation pattern selection mode (a variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), which will be described later: see FIG. 36)), a desired variation pattern can be selected from one or more types of variation patterns. Due to this, on the effect control unit 24 side, the effect modes corresponding to the respective game states of “normal state” and “CZ” are provided. (The details of the effect mode will be described later.) As a result, on the effect control unit 24 side, the “normal state” is provided. And “CZ” are provided corresponding to each game state, and an effect under these effect modes can be generated (details of the effect mode will be described later). For the “latent state”, a plurality of types of game states (variation pattern selection modes) of “latent state” and “CZ (internal gaming state is CZ: CZ (latent probability))” are provided, They are managed as different game states.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the “internal gaming state” includes a normal gaming state, a latent probability state, a short time state, and a probability variation state, and a gaming state relating to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol (in other words, regarding the determination of the effect) The types of “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode)” when paying attention to (gaming state) are larger than the types of internal gaming state, normal state, CZ (normal), latent state, CZ (latent state), A short-time state and a probability variation state are included. In this way, the “internal gaming state” focusing on the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support is different from the “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode)” focusing on the determination of the variation pattern of special symbols (decision of production). By managing it as a game, you can select a special symbol variation pattern that corresponds to the variation pattern selection mode even under the same internal gaming state, so the variation time of the symbol variation display game (game digestion time) And can make a big change to the production. For convenience of explanation, unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the internal game state is distinguished from a game state (variation pattern selection mode) when attention is paid to determination of a special symbol variation pattern (decision of production). In some cases, it is simply referred to as a “gaming state”.

<4. About winning>
Next, “winning” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. Type per hit)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs a big hit lottery (win lottery) for multiple types of hits. The hit types are “16R long open probability variable big hit”, “12R long open positive variable big hit”, “12R long open non-probable big hit”, “5R long open positive variable big hit”, “5R long open non-probable big hit”, “2R Plural types of hits such as “short open latent big hit”, “2R short open non-probable big hit A, B”, and “small hit (small hit A, small hit B)” are included.

  Of these hits, "16R long open probability variable big hit", "12R long open positive variable big hit", "12R long open non-probable big hit", "5R long open positive variable big hit", "5R long open non-probable big hit", "2R short "Open-latency big hit" and "2R short open non-probable big hit A, B" are hits belonging to the "big hit" type that triggers the operation of the condition device, and "small hit" does not trigger the condition device. Is a hit belonging to the category. Here, the “condition device” is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, in which a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or a game ball is displayed. The one that operates when it passes a specific area in the big prize opening. Each of the hits belonging to the above-mentioned “big hit” type and the hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type (small hits) both have an opportunity to shift to a special gaming state (winning game) with opening / closing operation of the big prize opening (occurrence trigger) It is a hit. Therefore, hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type are different from simple “losing”.

  Of the hits belonging to the above "big hit" category, "16R long open probability variable big hit", "12R long open positive change big hit", "5R long open positive change big hit", and "2R short open probability positive big hit" are the end of the big hit game This is a jackpot type belonging to “probability big hit” in which a later gaming state is shifted to a gaming state with at least a high probability state (in this embodiment, a probability variation state or a latent probability state). In addition, “12R long open non-probable big hit” and “2R short open non-probable big hit A, B” indicate that the game state after the big hit game is at least a game state with a low probability state (in this embodiment, a normal game) The big hit type belonging to the “non-probable big hit” to be shifted to a state or a short-time state). The small hits A to B are hit types for continuing the gaming state at the time of winning. The “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type, but for convenience of explanation, unless otherwise necessary, it is treated as one of the big hit types in the same row without being distinguished from the above big hit.

  Among the above-mentioned hit types, the hit types for the big hit lottery on the special figure 1 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 1 side) include “12R long open probability variable big hit”, “12R long open non-probable big hit”, “5R "Long Open Probability Big Hit", "5R Long Open Non-Probable Big Hit", "2R Short Open Latent Profit Big Hit", "2R Short Open Non-Probable Big Hit", and "Small Hits A to B" are included (Fig. 4 (A) reference). In addition, the hit types of the big hit lottery on the special figure 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side) are “16R long open probability variable big hit”, “12R long open positive variable big hit”, and “2R short open non-probable big hit B”. (See FIG. 4B). In the present embodiment, the winning type relating to the special figure 1 side executes a hit game for opening the “lower big prize opening 40”, and in the case of the winning type relating to the special figure 2 side, the “right big prize opening 50”. The game is executed per game.

(4-2. Per game)
Next, the winning game based on each hit described above will be described.

(4-2-1.16R long opening chance change hit game)
A winning game with 16R long open probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “16R probability variable big hit game”) is a big hit with a prescribed number of rounds of 16 rounds. In this embodiment, the right big prize opening 50 in one round game. The maximum opening time is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long opening time”. Here, the “long open time” means that there is a possibility that the number of winnings in the big winning opening within the time will reach the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) (the possibility of reaching the maximum number of winnings is sufficient). It is determined as a time span. The opening / closing pattern in which the maximum opening time is set to the “long opening time” is referred to as a “long opening pattern”.

  After the start of the round game and the right big prize opening 50 is opened, when the above maximum opening time has elapsed, the right big prize opening 50 is closed and the current round game is finished, and the specified number of rounds is 16 rounds. If it has not reached, after a predetermined time (interval between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. However, if the number of wins in the right big prize opening 50 reaches the maximum number of prizes (for example, 9) even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, the right big prize winning opening 50 is closed and the current round game ends. Then, after a predetermined time (interval between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. In other words, when the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed or when the number of winning prizes at the grand prize opening reaches the maximum number of winnings (the grand prize opening closing condition), it will be released. The special winning opening is closed, and the next round game is entered with a predetermined interval (see “12R long open probability change big hit”, “5R long open non-probable big hit”, “ The same applies to “2R short-open latent probability big hit”, “12R long-open non-probable big hit”, and “2R short-open non-probable big hit A, B”).

  The above-mentioned “interval time between rounds” between round games is “remaining ball discharge time” and “interval time before opening” after the remaining ball discharge time elapses until the next round game starts. Consists of. The above “remaining ball discharge time” refers to an extra time (for example, 1980 ms) for discharging the remaining balls inside the big winning opening after the closing of the big winning opening. As the time width, the big winning opening is closed. Sufficient time is ensured until the game ball won immediately before passing through the winning detection switch (the lower large winning port sensor 42a or the right large winning port sensor 52a) formed in the large winning port. Also, the “interval before opening” means that after the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time has passed and the remaining balls in the big winning opening are considered discharged, the big winning opening in the next round game is released. A time width (for example, 20 ms) that defines the interval interval. Even if the lower major prize opening sensor 42a or the right major prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball during the pre-opening interval, the game ball is regarded as an illegal prize due to fraud, and predetermined error processing (error due to illegal prize) Process). In the present embodiment, an illegal winning can be monitored more strictly by providing the pre-opening interval time after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed.

(4-2-2.12R Long Opening Probability Game by Winning Big Hit)
The winning game with 12R long open probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “12R probability variable big hit game”) is basically the same as the content of the 16R probability variable big hit game described above except that the prescribed number of rounds is twelve. Therefore, the 12R probability variable big hit game is a big hit game to which a relatively lower profit is given than the 16R probability variable big hit game (in this embodiment, there is a difference in the number of winning balls for four rounds). In the case of the present embodiment, as already explained, in the case of 12R probability variation big hit game on the special figure 1 side, a winning game is executed in which the “lower prize winning opening 40” is opened, and the 12R probability variable big hit on the special figure 2 side is executed. In the case of a game, the game is executed when the “right prize opening 50” is opened.

(4-2-3.5R long open probability change big hit, 5R long open non-probable big hit hit game)
A winning game with 5R long open probability change big hit (hereinafter referred to as “5R positive variable big hit game”) or a hit game with 5R long open non-probable big hit (hereinafter referred to as “5R non-probable big hit game”) has a specified number of rounds. Except for 5 rounds, it is basically the same as the contents of the 12R probability variation big hit game on the special figure 1 side described above.

(4-2-4.12R long open non-probability big hit game)
The winning game with 12R long open non-probable big hit (hereinafter referred to as “12R non-probable big hit game”) is a big hit with a prescribed round number of 12 rounds, but the big hit game mode differs depending on the number of rounds. Specifically, in the period when the jackpot game is executed, the first half section (first half) from the first round to the specific number of rounds, and the second half section (second half) from the next round to the last round The game operation mode is different.

  Specifically, out of 12R (round) which is the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to '29 .8 seconds' of the long winning time up to the 10R of the first half. On the other hand, after the 11th R in the second half, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to a short opening time of “0.1 second”. The “short opening time” is defined as a time width in which it is difficult to win the big prize opening itself, unlike the above long opening time. Unless specifically required, the opening / closing pattern in which the maximum opening time is set to the “short opening time” is referred to as a “short opening pattern”. However, an opening / closing pattern in which the maximum opening time is set to be shorter than the “long opening time” may be referred to as a “short opening pattern”.

  In the present embodiment, a prize is awarded within the “short opening time” according to the performance of the game ball falling direction changing member or the launching device (for example, the rate of continuous firing speed of the game ball per unit time) or the position where the big prize opening is formed. It is difficult or impossible to reach the “maximum winning number” which is one of the mouth closing conditions. In the 12R non-probability big hit game, it is only possible to obtain award balls (profit) up to the 10th R in the first half where the maximum opening time is set to the long opening time.

  Therefore, in the case of the above-mentioned “12R non-probable big hit game”, the first half (from 1R to 10R) is “12R probable big hit game” and the mechanical game action that appears on the appearance (open / close operation pattern of the lower prize winning opening 40) ) Are the same (may be substantially the same) hit game operation mode, but the second half (after 11R) has a different hit game operation mode (short open pattern). Then, the 12R non-probability big hit game is a big hit game to which a relatively lower profit is given than the 12R probable big hit game (in this embodiment, a difference in the number of winning balls for two rounds may occur).

(4-2-3.2R short-release latent big hit, 2R short-open non-probable big hit A, B hit game)
2R short open latent hit per game (hereinafter referred to as “2R latent open big hit game”) and 2R short open non-probable big hit (2R short open non-probable big hit A, B) per game (hereinafter referred to as “2R normal Is called a big hit with a prescribed number of rounds, and in this embodiment, the maximum opening of the big winning opening (the lower big winning opening 40 or the right big winning opening 50) in one round game is opened. The time is set to 0.1 seconds of “short open time”. Therefore, in 2R latent big hit games or 2R short-open non-probable big hits, the big prize opening is only opened for a short open time (0.1 seconds), and the number of round games is also small, which is practically two rounds. Is a big hit game with almost no prize balls (Accurately, there is a possibility of winning a big prize opening, but the maximum opening time of the big winning opening of each round game is short opening time ) Is less likely, and virtually no prize balls are obtained.

  In addition, the hit effect during the 2R latent probability hit game of the special figure 1 side (the effect that appears during the hit game) is the hit in the 2R short open non-probable big hit A of the hit type of the special figure 1 side. An effect that is substantially the same (same or very similar) as the medium effect appears. In other words, the action related to the hit game including the mid-game effect due to the 2R short-opening latent big hit shows substantially the same behavior as the game action related to the 2R short-open non-probable big hit A. It is difficult or impossible to identify whether or not a hit game is being executed. As a result, even if the 2R short-open uncertain big hit A is won, it is possible to give the player a sense of winning expectation for the “2R short-open latent big hit” that will trigger the transition to the high probability state. It has become.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of award balls in the big hit game, in other words, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player (the number of winning prize balls) is different according to the type of the big hit. Yes. In addition, although it has been described that the maximum opening time is set to the short opening time in the 2R latent probability big hit game and the 2R short opening non-probability variable big hit, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same long open time as 16R probability variable big hit game or 12R probability variable big hit game or the like may be set so that a winning to the big prize opening is allowed to some extent, and it is difficult or impossible to reach the maximum winning number. Although it is possible, even if it is set to an opening time (intermediate opening time that is shorter than the long opening time and longer than the short opening time: 5 seconds) that can secure a certain number of winnings to the big winning opening Good (the same applies to the small hit games described later). Further, in order to vary the number of winning balls (special prize number: T1Y) by winning, the maximum winning number may be set to a different number according to the type of the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the winning type relating to the special figure 1 side executes a winning game for opening the “lower big prize opening 40”, and in the case of the winning type relating to the special figure 2 side, the “right big prize opening 50”. Explained that the game will be executed per game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a hit type for executing a hit game for opening the “right big prize opening 50” on the special figure 1 side may be included, or a hit on the special figure 2 side may be included. The type may include a hit type for executing a hit game in which the “lower prize winning opening 40” is opened. In addition, a special hit that opens either the “right big prize opening 50” or the “lower big prize opening 40” depending on the number of rounds in the special figure 1 side hit type and / or the special figure 2 side hit type. The type may be included. For example, from the 1R round to a predetermined number of rounds (for example, the 8th round), the lower major prize opening 40 is opened, and from the subsequent rounds (for example, the 9th to 16th rounds), the right big prize opening 50 is opened. It may include a hit type such as executing a big hit game such as.

(4-2-4. Winning game with small hits (A / B with small hits))
In the hit game with small hits A and B (hereinafter referred to as “small hit game”), the big prize opening is opened twice, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening per round is 2R latent big hit game It is set to 0.1 seconds, which corresponds to the maximum opening time, and the interval time between the closing of the first big winning opening and the opening of the second big winning opening is between rounds of 2R latent big hit games and 2R normal big hit games The same time width as the interval time is set. Regarding the closing condition of the big prize opening 50 in the small hit game, the maximum opening and closing operation time of the big prize opening 50 (opening and closing operation time for executing the opening of the big prize opening 50 twice) has passed or the large winning opening 50 is closed. This is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied when the number of game balls won in the winning opening 50 reaches the maximum number (for example, 9). In the case of this embodiment, since the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 50 does not reach the maximum winning number within the maximum opening / closing operation time, the maximum opening / closing operation time of the big winning opening 50 actually passes. After that, specifically, after a series of opening / closing operations of the big prize opening is executed, the small hit game is ended. In other words, during the small hit game, the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 50 captured from the appearance is controlled in substantially the same manner of operation as the 2R latent big hit game or the 2R normal big hit game. Yes. Since the small hits A and B are the big hit lottery objects on the special figure 1 side, the lower big prize opening 40 is controlled to open and close during the small hit game.

  Since this “small hit” is a hit type that does not trigger the operation of the “condition device”, a round game like “big hit” is not executed. However, by controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening in substantially the same manner of operation as 2R latent big hit game, a pseudo round game is realized, and it looks as if 2R short open big hit hit and 2R short open non- It makes it possible to disguise as if you were won by a promising big hit.

  In the case of the present embodiment, since the small hits A and B are the big hit lottery objects on the special figure 1 side, the hit during the small hit game is the hit in the 2R latent big hit game or the 2R normal big hit game A An effect that is substantially the same (same or very similar) as the effect appears. In other words, the action related to the small hit game including the hit effect shows substantially the same behavior as the game action related to the 2R short open latency big hit or the 2R short open non-probable big hit A, and as viewed from the player side, It is difficult or impossible to identify whether or not a hit game is being executed. As a result, even when winning a small hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of winning expectation for the “2R short open latent big hit” that is a trigger for the transition to the high probability state. Further, if the player is in a high probability state, the player can be given a sense of tension to fall to the low probability state by winning the 2R short-open uncertain big hit A.

(4-3. Playing state after winning game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the gaming state to be transferred after each winning game will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state that shifts after each winning game. Each game state shown is not an internal game state but a game state in which attention is paid to the variation pattern selection mode.

(4-3-1.16R, 12R, 5R game state after the end of the game with a promising big hit)
After the end of the 16R, 12R, or 5R probability variation big hit game, as shown in the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the win, it is shifted to the “probability changed state”. When this “probability change state” is reached, until the next big hit is confirmed (until the “big hit is confirmed”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the big hit, and the occurrence of the big hit game is confirmed. Or, it may be a case where a big hit is won.

  Note that the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of special symbol variation display operations (hereinafter abbreviated as “special symbol variation frequency”)) is a predetermined number of times (the special symbol variation display game 1). 2 and the total number of executions (total number of fluctuations of the special symbols 1 and 2)): 70 times) until the end or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times, the certain variation state is continued. When the special symbol variation display game is finished without confirming the big win, the probability variation state is terminated and the next game is shifted to the “normal state (the internal game state is the normal game state)”. May be. In this case, this is a so-called “frequency change probability changer”.

(4-3-2.5R, 12R non-probable big hit game state after the game)
After the 5R, 12R non-probable big hit game, as shown in the figure, the game is shifted to the “time saving state” regardless of the game state at the time of winning the win. When this “short time state” is reached, the short time state until the special symbol variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 60 times) or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times. When the special symbol variation display game is finished without determining the big hit within the predetermined number of times, the short time state is finished and the next game is shifted to the “normal state”.

(4-3-3.2R gaming state after the end of the game with a big hit probability)
After the 2R latent large hit game, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning is “normal state”, it is “CZ (latency probability)”, and if it is latent state, it is “latent probability state”. If it is, the state is shifted to the “probable change state”. If the game state at the time of winning is a latent probability state, the game may be shifted to a probability change state instead of the latent probability state.

  In the present embodiment, when the game state at the time of winning is “CZ”, the following transition control is performed according to the internal game state. If the game state at the time of winning is “CZ (normal)” in which the internal game state is the normal game state, the internal game state is shifted to “CZ (latency)” in the latent state, and the internal game When the state is the latent state “CZ (latent state)”, the state is shifted to the “latent state”. Note that “CZ (latency)” in which the internal gaming state is in the latent state is managed as the same gaming state (variation pattern selection mode) as “CZ (normal)” in which the internal gaming state is in the normal gaming state. The entity is “CZ” whose internal gaming state is “latent state”.

  In the case of “CZ (latency probability)” after the end of the 2R latent probability winning game, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is until a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or within the predetermined number of times. The “CZ (latency probability)” continues until a big hit is made, and when the special symbol fluctuation display game is finished without the big hit being determined within the predetermined number of times, the “CZ (latency probability)” is finished and the next The game is shifted to the “latent state”, and the fact that it is in the latent state is revealed to the player from the standpoint of production. In the drawing, “CZ (4 times: latent probability)” is indicated. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, after the 2R latent large hit game is finished, in order to give a sense of expectation of transition to the latent probability state, the 2R short open latency is related to the game state after the small hit game described later. The number of continuations of “CZ” due to the big hit is set to a larger number of continuations than those due to the 2R short open non-probable big hit or the small hit.

(4-3-4.2R game state after the normal big hit game)
After the 2R normal big hit game, as shown in the drawing, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is “normal state”, it is “CZ (normal)”, and if the game state is latent state, short-time state, or probability change state, it is “normal state”. It is supposed to be migrated. If the gaming state at the time of winning is “CZ”, the game is shifted to “CZ (normal)”.

  In addition, when it becomes “CZ (normal)” after the end of the 2R normal big hit game, the big hit is made until or after the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is over a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) The “CZ (normal)” continues until the game is confirmed, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished without confirming the big hit within the number of times, the “CZ” is finished and the “normal state” is started from the next game. From the standpoint of production, the player is clarified that the normal state is reached. However, the number of CZ continuations set by the 2R short open non-probable big hit is set to be smaller (3 times) than the number set by the 2R short open probable big hit (4 times).

  In this embodiment, the 2R latent big hit game and the 2R normal big hit game have the same or substantially the same hit game operation mode, and the game state after the end of the hit game is different in internal game state, but the variation pattern is determined. With regard to (decision of production), it is possible to shift to “CZ” managed as the same gaming state (variation pattern selection mode). Therefore, not only during the winning game but also during the predetermined game period after the winning game (in the case of this embodiment, at least three times), the player side does not know which winning is won I have to. This makes it possible to give a sense of expectation and tension to a high probability state.

(4-4. Game state after the small hit game)
After the small hit game, the internal gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning is not performed. Therefore, the internal game state at the time of winning the small hit and the internal game state after the small hit game are both the same internal game state. This is different from “big hit” in which the transition control of the internal gaming state can be performed.

  However, in this embodiment, the transition control of the “internal game state” due to the small win is not performed, while the “game state (variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern change mode) related to the determination of the variation pattern of special symbols (decision of production)” is not performed. The transfer control of the minute designation number (Tcode))) ′ is performed. Using such a transition mode, for example, when the gaming state after the small hit game and the gaming state after the 2R latent large hit game are shifted to the same gaming state, the effect mode in which both perform the same presentation Even after the small hit game, it is possible to generate an effect under the same effect mode as after the 2R latent large hit game. As a result, the player can be given a sense of rushing into a high-probability state that the player may win the 2R short-release latent big hit and move to the “latent state”. ing. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 4, the gaming state after the end of each small hit game when the small hits A and B are won will be described in detail.

  Here, the “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” is data that functions as the “variation pattern selection mode” and identifies the current gaming state. The “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” is mainly used when a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected (see step S412 (special symbol variation pattern creation processing) in FIG. 12 described later). Work as 'mode'. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 36, when the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is “00H”, it indicates “normal (normal state)”, and when it is “01H”. “Probability change state (probability change)” is indicated, “02H” indicates “latent probability state”, “03H” indicates “time reduction state (time reduction)”, and “06H” indicates CZ. This variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is changed when there is a change in the gaming state. Therefore, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is different from data identifying the internal gaming state itself, such as a gaming state determination number (YJ) described later, in that it identifies the gaming state as described above.

(4-4-1. Game state after the small hit game when the small hit A is won)
After the small hit game by the small hit A, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is “normal state” or “CZ”, the game state is shifted to “CZ”, and another game state (latency probability state, short time state, or probability change state) In this case, there is no transition of the gaming state, and the gaming state at the time of winning is continued.

  With regard to the small hit A, when the game state at the time of winning is “normal state”, when shifting to “CZ”, the number of times that CZ is continued (hereinafter referred to as “CZ continuation number”), A predetermined number of times (for example, twice) is set. When the game is shifted to “CZ” by winning the small hit A, the “CZ” is displayed until the end of the CZ continuation number in which the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is set or until the big hit is determined within the number of times. "" Is continued, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished without determining the big hit within the number of times, "CZ" is finished. When the game state when “CZ” is ended is “CZ (latency probability)”, the game is shifted from the next game to “latency probability state” and is “CZ (normal)”. The game is shifted from the next game to the “normal state” (the same applies to the small hit B described later).

(4-4-2. Game state after the small hit game when winning the small hit B)
After the small hit game by the small hit B, the same shift control as in the case of the small hit A is performed (see the column of the small hit B in FIG. 4). However, the number of CZ continuations set by the small hit B is set to be larger than the small hit A (two times) (for example, three times).

  The “CZ” is a gaming state that can be shifted to even after the 2R latent big hit game is over. For this reason, when the game is shifted to “CZ” due to the 2R short open latent large win or the small hit A or the small hit B win, an effect mode (CZ effect mode) that produces an effect corresponding to “CZ”. In the production, it is concealed whether the internal gaming state is a “latency probability state”, that is, whether the jackpot winning probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state. . In this embodiment, although there is a difference in the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function which is an internal function between the normal gaming state and the latent probability state, the mechanical gaming operation state appearing on the appearance is the same state. Pay attention (both are 'no power support state') and give the player a sense of expectation of a high probability state by not letting the player know what kind of gaming state it is in terms of production Can be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the number of CZ continuations, when “2R short open latent big hit” is won, the CZ continuation number “4 times” is set, and thereby the variation number is limited to 4 times CZ (CZ 4 times). Will be transferred to. Then, after this CZ is completed (however, when CZ is completed four times without winning a big or small hit during CZ), the gaming state is shifted from CZ to the latent state. In other words, with respect to the production mode, the CZ production mode (secret production mode) in which the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is a secret state is shifted to a production mode in which the game state is definitely notified. Therefore, when “CZ” continues four times, the “latent state” becomes clear. In this connection, if you win either small hit A or small hit B where the big win lottery probability state does not change, depending on the winning small hit, from 4 times by 2R short open latent big hit The number of CZ continuations (2 to 3 times) is set to be smaller. Thereby, every time the game in the CZ is digested, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension that the “hidden state” may reach four times when it becomes deterministic. Thereby, whenever the game in CZ is digested, the expectation that the jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state increases, and it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement.

(4-5. About winning in CZ)
In this embodiment, when winning 2R short open uncertain variation latent big hit or small hit A or B in “CZ”, CZ continuation corresponding to the won win is set as the new CZ continuation count. The number of times is reset. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of CZ continuations is four or more when the 2R short-release latent big hit is won. For example, if you win the small hit B and move to CZ (CZ: 3 times), and you win the small hit B again in the third time in the CZ, the CZ continuation count 3 times will be reset by the small hit B win, The CZ period is extended to a maximum of 6 times of “CZ period 3 times + reset 3 times”. In other words, even if CZ is continued four times, it is not always clear that the state is in a latent state, and a surprisingly rich game can be created.

  Of course, when “CZ” is continued four times, it may be configured that it is clear that the state is in the latent state. For example, in the normal state, after shifting to “CZ (normal)” due to winning at the small hit, as long as the user stays in the “CZ (normal)”, 2R short open non-probability latent big hit, Even if one of the small hits A and the small hit B is re-winned, the “CZ (normal)” can be configured so that the number of continuations does not exceed a maximum of 3. In addition, when “CZ (latency probability)” is selected as one of 2R short open non-probability variation latent large hit, small hit A, and small hit B, the CZ continuation count corresponding to the hit type is not newly set. It can be configured. Thereby, if “CZ” is continued four times, it is possible to create a game such that it is clear that the state is in the latent state.

  It is also possible to create a situation where the latent state becomes clear when the number of CZ continuations is less than 4. For example, if you win 2R short open latent big hit during CZ and win the small hit A for the first time after the transition to “CZ (latent)”, the CZ continuation count “2” due to the small hit A win will be reset. Once set, the CZ period will be “1 time after transition to“ CZ (latency) ”+ 2 times re-set by winning a small hit A”, which is shortened to “3 times”, which is less than the original “4 times”. The After the CZ period ends, the gaming state is shifted from CZ to the latent state, and the effect mode described later can be shifted to the “latent state effect mode” for definite notification of the latent state. it can. Thereby, even if CZ does not continue four times, the latent state can be clarified, so that it is possible to create a surprisingly rich game. As already explained, if the winning state is a 2R short-opening latent big hit and the gaming state at the time of winning is “CZ (latent probability)”, the game is shifted to the latent state after the winning game. Therefore, with respect to the production mode, the concealment production mode is terminated and the upgrade is made to the latent production mode. In this case as well, the latent state can be clarified with less than 4 CZ continuations.

  In “CZ” of the present embodiment, the number of CZ continuations is set to 4 times (the maximum number of the operation-suspended balls). The reason for ending “CZ” in a short period of time is that it is bothersome for the player to keep the gaming state secret for a long period of time because of the production relationship of encouraging the expectation of the high probability state. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of CZ continuations is stopped to be equal to or less than the maximum number of reserved balls, and a “short-term settlement-type production mode (production mode in which a gaming state is revealed in a short period)” is set.

(4-6. About fluctuation patterns in CZ)
In the present embodiment, for the “normal state”, the “short time state”, and the like, a variation pattern that defines a different variation time according to the number of suspended balls can be selected. However, a single loss variation pattern (CZ loss variation) is selected as the loss variation pattern that can be selected during CZ, regardless of the number of suspended balls. That is, the variation pattern of the same variation time is selected as the loss variation pattern selected during the CZ, regardless of the number of active balls. Thereby, when it is “losing” in CZ, the same time width, that is, the same effect time width is secured. In the case of winning, a hit variation pattern (CZ hit variation) having a longer variation time than the loss variation pattern is selected because the hit is reported. As described above, the reason why the variation variation pattern selected during CZ is set to the same variation time regardless of the number of operating balls is as follows.

  In general, even if there is no electric support, the number of balls that can be suspended can be changed in a relatively short time (in a general ball game machine, the operation is suspended during a single symbol variation display game. If there are many cases where the number of balls is increased by about 1 to 3), and if this is used to select a variation pattern according to the number of suspended balls, the presentation time (design) for each symbol variation display game The execution time of the variable display game) can be changed, and various effects can be generated. Such a gaming state includes a “normal state” and a “short-time state”.

  However, if the effect time of the symbol variation display game is made different depending on the number of activated balls, the effect time of the current symbol variation display game and the effect time of the next symbol variation display game are likely to be different. In a short period of time, the production time of the symbol variation display game changes frequently, and there is a continuous relevance effect (for example, a story-style production of a story tailored) across multiple symbol variation display games. It will be difficult to deploy. For example, in the CZ effect mode, when a story-like effect including a related story effect of multiple stories is displayed, if the effect times of all story effects are the same, this is continuously developed. It is easy to proceed (the process of selecting an effect on the effect control unit 24 side is facilitated and the effect control burden is reduced), but if the effect time changes according to the number of reserved balls, In relation to the development, for each story production, it is necessary to provide many productions corresponding to the number of active suspension balls of 0 to 3, and it is also necessary to produce productions with different production times and related expressions. As a result, the types of production patterns increase, and the production control burden associated with production selection processing on the production control unit 24 side increases.

  In addition, when a narrative-like effect such as the above is displayed, it is conceivable to use a pre-reading notice effect. However, since the pre-reading notice effect is a continuous notice effect for the number of active suspended balls, Depending on the start timing of the production, the number of existing operation hold memories will be different each time, and as in the case described above, the production time of the symbol variation display game will change frequently and the production with close relations will be developed continuously. It will be difficult to follow. In addition, since the pre-reading notice effect is a continuous notice effect that targets the number of currently activated balls, the number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect is likely to be different every time depending on the start timing of the pre-reading notice effect. For this reason, as in the present embodiment, the expectation of the latent state is increased as the number of continuous times of the CZ effect mode continues, or the CZ effect mode is shifted to the latent effect mode when the CZ effect mode continues for a predetermined number of times. It is not possible to make a definite notification that the state is in the latent state. In particular, the CZ effect mode works as an effect mode that can conceal the probability of winning a lottery, so under such an effect mode, it is possible to develop a narrative-like effect that enlivens the expectation of a high probability state. This is extremely effective in improving the fun of the game. In addition, the above-mentioned “story-style production” is, for example, a “battle production” in which a battle is developed while confronting the enemy, or a “story” (story) in which the contents of old stories and fairy tales are developed. Some sort of relationship between productions that can be developed during a specific period (during CZ), such as “production” and “participation (mission) production” of a player participation type that gives a predetermined command to the player every time the symbol variation display game is executed There is no particular limitation as long as an expression having a property can be made.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of the length of the production time as much as possible, a specific game state (CZ) in which the same variation pattern with the same variation time is selected regardless of the number of activated balls. The number of fluctuations that the specific gaming state can continue is fixed according to the winning type (2R short open latent big hit, 2R short open non-probable big hit, small hit A, small hit B) The development of the wind production is made easy so that the production control burden can be reduced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as already demonstrated, the expectation to the latent state transition can be enhanced according to the number of CZ continuations. And the upper limit number of times is set to 4 times of the same value of the maximum reserved storage number. The reason is as follows.

  First, when the secret effect mode such as the CZ effect mode is continued for a long period of time (for example, for several tens of games), until the player can be sure that the player is not in a latent state (high probability state) (for example, The secret production mode ends and the normal state is changed to the normal production mode where the normal state becomes definitive), and the game is placed in a situation where the number of games has to be consumed for a long period of time, which is disadvantageous for the player. . In particular, in recent years, there are many players who refrain from gaming machines in which the concealment effect mode continues for a long period of time. It is considered preferable to set the mode.

  Secondly, when determining the number of times the concealment effect mode such as the CZ effect mode is to be continued, it is interesting to make the effect made under the concealment effect mode a continuous notice effect such as a “prefetching notice effect” described later. It is effective in improving. In other words, it can be said that it is preferable that the effect made in the concealment effect mode is pretending to be like the pre-reading notice effect. This will be described as follows.

  Since the pre-reading notice effect is a continuous notice effect for the existing operation holding ball, the number of executions is limited to the maximum number of reserved memories (four times). Focusing on this point, the CZ continuation count is set within a range of four times of the maximum reserved storage number so that the player can perform the performance under the CZ production mode as if the pre-reading notice production is performed. . This is not because many players are engaged in the game while paying attention to the on-hold display that informs the number of balls on hold, but the game is usually performed while paying attention to the notice effect that is displayed at a position that is larger than the on-hold display and easy to see. As mentioned above, and as described above, the number of active reserved balls increases by 1 to 3 even during the period of one symbol variation display game, and the number of active reserved balls changes in a short period of time. This is because, for example, there is a high possibility that the number of operation holding balls increases to 2 to 4 at the start of the next game even if there is one operation holding ball at the time of entering the CZ. In this embodiment, by limiting the number of CZ continuations within the range of the maximum number of reserved memories, an effect made in the CZ effect mode is made to look like a pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect), can do.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, an effect mode (effect state) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for causing an effect related to the gaming state to appear, and is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. Specifically, the above-mentioned effect modes include “normal effect mode” when the game state is “normal game state”, “CZ effect mode” when “CZ”, and “latency state”. There are multiple types of performance modes according to each gaming state, such as “latent probability effect mode”, “short time effect mode” in the case of “short time state”, and “probability effect mode” in the case of “probability change state”. Is provided. In addition, “CZ (normal)” and “CZ (latency probability)”, which are the above “CZ”, are managed as the same gaming state, and in the case of “CZ (normal)” or “CZ (latency probability)” Are placed under the same “CZ (CHANCE ZONE) production mode”. Thereby, from the standpoint of production, the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is set in a concealed state. The “CZ effect mode” serves as a “secret effect mode” in which the jackpot lottery probability state is concealed from the effect. Such a “secret display mode” works as an effect mode that gives the player an expectation of a high probability state.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) includes a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) designates a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the current gaming state (including the internal gaming state), or the gaming state "Specific effect control command (in this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command, a decoration symbol designation command, a game state designation command, a short-time end command, a predetermined command transmitted during hitting" (Applies to effect control commands including information related to gaming state managed by the main control unit, such as “big hit start interval command (big hit start command)” and “big hit end interval command (big hit end command)”) ” Transition control between multiple types of performance modes in a manner that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed on the main control unit 20 side And it is configured to function. The production control unit 24 has a function unit (production state management means) for managing the production mode related to the gaming state. Specifically, the above-mentioned specific production control command is used to grasp the internal gaming state and the variation pattern selection mode managed on the main control unit 20 side, and maintain this in a form consistent with the main control unit 20 side. Configured to be manageable.

(5-1-1. About production under each production mode)
In each effect mode, for example, the background display as the background of the decorative symbol variation display screen is different so that it can be understood what kind of game state the player is staying in the effect mode. A background image effect appears. In addition to changing the background image effect according to each effect mode, each effect mode can be achieved by using a decorative pattern with a different pattern corresponding to each effect mode, or by changing sound effects, light effects, etc. Can also be suggested.

  In addition, in the “CZ effect mode” corresponding to “CZ (normal)” and “CZ (latency probability)” of the present embodiment, the internal gaming state is the latent state (high probability state) or the normal gaming state (low probability). Although it has been described that it is the same production mode regardless of whether the state is), the present invention is not limited to this. “Genuine CZ effect mode (first secret effect mode)” under the latent state (high probability state) and “Gasse CZ effect mode” under the normal game state (low probability state) according to the internal game state (Second secrecy effect mode) "may be provided, and transition control to these effect modes may be possible. In this case, by changing the appearance rate of a specific effect (for example, a specific character image) between the “genuine CZ effect mode” and the “gase CZ effect mode”, any effect is given to the player. An inference element as to whether you are staying in the mode can be given.

(5-2. Advance notice)
Next, the notice effect will be described. The effect control unit 24, under the above-described effect mode, includes the contents of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, the variation pattern information included in at least the variation pattern designation command (for example, winning lottery result, reach effect) Based on the presence / absence and the variation time of the special symbol, etc., a function unit (notice performance appearance control means) that controls various notice effects related to the big hit lottery result under the aforementioned effect mode is provided. The notice appearance appearance control means of the present embodiment includes information (for example, winning lottery result information, presence / absence of reach effect, special stop symbol type information (information on the hit type) included in the variation pattern designation command and / or the decorative symbol designation command. , Various notice effects can be controlled on the basis of special symbol variation time information).

  Such notice effect forms include not only notice effects represented by “reach effects (effect forms related to reach variation patterns)” but also those that occur in association with these effects or independently. Basically, these production modes are such that a plurality of notice productions are generated in duplicate to increase the game content, and the reliability or expectation level (hereinafter, “ (Referred to as “winning expectation”), and serves as a “drinking effect” to give the player a sense of winning expectation (winning expectation) for the hit type. Representative examples of the notice effect include “reach effect”, for example, “pseudo-continuous effect” and “prefetching notice effect”.

(5-2-1. Reach Production)
The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode with a so-called “reach state” (variable display mode with a reach state). Specifically, an effect mode in which the final result is derived and displayed via the reach state. Say. This reach effect is a notice (suggestion) of the degree of expectation of winning winning (that there is a possibility of being a big hit), and includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the degree of expectation of winning winning. For example, when a reach effect with a specific reach state appears, the winning expectation is relatively higher than when a reach effect with a normal reach state ('normal reach (N reach)') appears. There is. Such reach production with a specific reach state is called “super reach (SP reach)”. Many of these SP reaches have a longer production time (variation time) than the N reach in order to increase the expectation of a big hit. Also, for SP reach, multiple types of SP reach with different winning expectations (weak SP reach type (for example, weak SP reach 1-5 (the higher the number, the higher the expectation)), winning expectation than weak SP reach type “Strong SP reach type (for example, strong SP reach 1-3)” is included.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-continuous production)
“Pseudo-ream” refers to a production mode with a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative symbol. “Pseudo variation” refers to a part or all of a decorative symbol in a decorative symbol variation display game. Is temporarily stopped (a change stop operation that looks as if it has been stopped), and a display operation such as executing a re-change display operation of the decorative symbol from the temporary stop state is performed once or multiple times (this In the embodiment, it means a variable display mode that is expressed as if a variable display operation to be set as one set is executed a plurality of times by repeating a maximum of four times. This is different from a “prefetching notice effect (continuous notice effect)” described later that is developed over a plurality of variable display operations.

  When performing this pseudo-variation, for example, a temporary reach state (a change display state that suggests that there is a possibility of a reach state before the temporary stop state, or that the reach symbol appears to stop) is formed. However, once it is temporarily stopped with a combination of symbols that are lost, it is displayed again, or it is replaced with a normal decorative symbol. A re-variable display operation can be performed after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols including a special decorative symbol (pseudo continuous activation chance symbol). Such “pseudo-reams” are mainly determined in terms of the rate of occurrence (probability of pseudo-reams depending on the number of pseudo-reams) so that the higher the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the winning expectation will be. It is used as a notice effect that suggests the possibility of production (expecting reach production) (in the case of this embodiment, it can be generated at the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before reach production)). The higher the number of times, the higher the winning expectation level, that is, the occurrence of an SP reach type with a relatively high winning expectation level. The fluctuation display operation developed after the pseudo fluctuation is finished is also referred to as “main fluctuation”. For example, in the case of passing through the reach state, the reach state is formed by this main fluctuation, and the reach effect appears. The final game result is derived and displayed.

（5-2-3.
In addition, the effect is that there is a possibility of winning a big hit for an operation-reserved ball (undigested operation-retained ball) that has not yet been provided for execution of the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of special symbol) There is a pre-reading notice effect that informs the degree of expectation in advance. Regarding the pre-reading notice effect, first, in the main control unit 20, when an operation holding ball is generated (when a start condition is satisfied), the operation holding ball is used for executing the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of a special symbol). Before being provided, a “pre-fetching determination” is performed to determine in advance the jackpot lottery result related to the operation-reserved ball (steps S319 to S320 in FIG. 10, S339 to S340 in FIG. 11 (random number determination process to special stop). Symbol data creation process), Steps S409 (random determination process for special electric accessory operation determination) to S410 (special stop symbol creation process) in FIG. 12).

  Furthermore, by using the result of the “pre-reading determination”, a “pre-reading variation pattern determination” is performed to determine in advance the variation pattern of the special symbol when the operation-pending ball is used for the execution of the symbol variation display game in the future. (Refer to S323 in FIG. 10 and S343 in FIG. 11 (starting port winning random number determination process)). The variation pattern of the special symbol determined in advance is referred to as a “prefetch variation pattern”. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance whether the reach state is a “reach variation pattern” or a “normal variation pattern” that does not pass the reach state. Since the prefetch variation pattern is determined using at least the winning lottery result, the prefetch variation pattern information transmitted to the effect control unit 24 includes information such as the presence / absence of reach, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream and the number of times. In addition, information on whether the variation pattern at the start of variation is a “hit variation pattern” at the time of winning a big hit (including a small hit) or “losing variation pattern” at the time of winning a loss is also included. When the information on the prefetch variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs effect control processing related to the prefetch notice effect. A series of processes for determining the prefetch variation pattern through the prefetch determination in this way is referred to as “prefetch determination”.

  Specifically, a “hold addition command” including information on the prefetch determination result (at least prefetch determination result information (information obtained by prefetching the winning result)) is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, and the hold addition command When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect, the effect control process related to the pre-reading notice effect based on the contents of the pre-reading determination result included in the command is performed. The upper byte side data for specifying the number and the lower byte side data for specifying the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern (see FIG. 5). However, the presentation control unit 24 does not necessarily perform pre-reading prediction when a pending addition command is received. If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided by lottery and the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executable, the design variation display that is performed at the timing when the action holding ball is generated or first is performed. At the same time as the start of the game, or at a predetermined timing during the game, a pre-reading notice effect for the currently activated ball is displayed.

  Note that the “look-ahead variation pattern” obtained by the pre-reading determination at the time of the operation holding ball occurrence is not necessarily the “variation pattern at the start of the variation” itself obtained when the operation holding ball is actually subjected to the variation display operation. There is no. For example, a case where the variation pattern at the start of the variation is a variation pattern designating “SP reach 1” will be representatively described. In this case, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the type of reach production of “strong SP reach 1”, but the “strong SP reach” type, which is the main point, specifically “strong SP reach”. It is possible to specify that the variation pattern (strong SP reach 1 to 3) of the same system as “SP reach” is classified as “strong SP reach type”. In the pre-reading notice effect related to this case, an effect mode related to the pre-read “strong SP reach type” appears. Therefore, the main information that is notified by the pre-reading notice effect is highly likely to occur in the future (the strong SP reach type in this case) with a high winning expectation degree for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future. It is information such as whether it is low, in other words, whether or not the possibility of winning a big hit is high, by informing the player in advance before such action information is digested, In addition to the current symbol variation display game, the interest of the player is improved not only for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future, but also for the fun of the game.

(5-3-1. Pre-reading notice effect mode: FIG. 5)
Next, referring to FIG. 5, the pre-reading notice effect mode will be described. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the prefetching notice effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 5, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of operation reserved balls on the special symbol 1 side in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (below the display area of the decorative symbol in the drawing). And a holding display area 77 for displaying the number of the operation holding balls on the special symbol 2 side are provided, and the presence or absence of the operation holding balls is lit (the operation holding balls are present: In the figure, “◯ (white circle mark)”) or in an unlit state (no action hold ball: circle shown by a broken line in the figure), information on the current number of hold balls is notified.

  The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and a maximum of four holding displays can be displayed in each holding display area 76, 77. It has become. Specifically, in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost action hold ball is the action that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among all the action hold balls in the hold display. Displayed as a holding ball. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, on-hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) each including a hold icon (icon image) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 by the same number (four) as the maximum hold storage number Special symbols 1 side), a2 to d2 (corresponds to special symbols 2 side). These hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are normally switched to the operation state (lighted state) by the same number, for example, three, as the number of operation hold balls existing when the prefetch determination is made. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of hold operations. However, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined prefetch notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). As a result, this works as a means for generating a pre-reading notice effect.

  When receiving the hold addition command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 performs a prefetch notice lottery for lottering whether or not the prefetch notice effect is performed as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Do. In this pre-reading notice lottery, the action-holding ball related to the winning becomes the action-holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (for example, the holding display part b2 with hatching in FIG. 5 is applicable). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice lottery execution condition is based on the condition that there is no reach fluctuation pattern type among the pre-reading fluctuation patterns related to the existing operation holding ball. This is in order to avoid the fact that other reach effects intervene in the middle of the pre-reading notice effects that are continuously generated, the original look-ahead notice effects are cut off, and the effect of the effects becomes dilute. . The winning probability by the pre-reading notice lottery is higher than that of “losing”, and in the case of the reach type with a relatively high expectation of winning, the pre-reading notice effect is generated. Depending on whether or not to do, winning expectation degree to the big hit is shown.

  When the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons of the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon targeted for the prefetching notice is notified from, for example, the blue color of the normal holding display. A “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is performed in which the display changes to a special holding color such as yellow, green, red, or rainbow. Here, the blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors on the hold icon mean that the winning winning expectation is higher in the order of this color. (Accurate) This is a premium hold icon. This reserved color is determined by lottery based on the contents of the prefetch fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the “big hit” is more likely to be selected than the “losing”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation level for winning, a reserved color with a high expected level of winning is selected with a high probability. It is like that. Note that the pre-reading notice effect mode of the “holding display changing system” is not limited to changing the holding color as described above, but may be changed to an icon imitating a special character. Such “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is displayed when an operation holding ball is generated, and is therefore referred to as a “winning change system” pre-reading notice effect.

  The existing operation holding balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one operation hold ball has been consumed, the display position of the hold display portion corresponding to the existing operation hold ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although the control is performed, the above-described hold display mode different from normal continues to be continuously displayed while changing the display position of the hold display. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the above-described hold display change system (change system at the time of winning) makes a special notice effect appear over a plurality of symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It can be said that this is an aspect of “continuous notice effect”. This continuous notice effect is executed across a plurality of symbol variation display games, and is different from the notice effect performed during one symbol variation operation like a pseudo-ream.

  In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect, the “variation start changing system” pre-reading notice effect that is triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game can be displayed. It has become. The “change start time change system” pre-reading notice effect is, for example, displaying a pre-reading-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, which is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuation display games and continuously displayed. This is a pre-reading notice effect of “image display change system”. In other words, the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is a symbol variation display game related to establishment of a start condition when a game ball wins a start opening and a start condition is satisfied during one symbol change display game. In addition to temporarily storing the right to execute and pre-fetching notice lottery regarding whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice effect, if this pre-reading notice lottery is won, all or a part of the reserved memory existing at that time, The symbol variation display game is expressed with some relevance. For example, in all or some of the symbol variation display games relating to the existing operation holding balls from the oldest operation holding ball to the operation holding ball subject to the pre-reading notice in the storage order, a pre-read-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (A preview image imitating the lightning bolt shown) is displayed. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation start change system” is the same as the “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect. It can be said that this is one aspect of the “notice effect”. In each symbol variation display game, a different preview image dedicated to prefetching may be used.

  In addition, the execution form of the pre-reading notice effect can be set to the following form. For example, (a) only the winning change system (holding display changing system) is executed, (b) only the change starting change system (image display changing system) is executed, (c) the winning change system and change starting change Various execution forms such as executing both of the systems can be adopted. In the present embodiment, the configurations (a) to (c) are configured to be executable. Specifically, through the pre-reading notice lottery, the pre-reading notice effect of the winning change system and the pre-reading notice effect of the changing system at the start of change are each drawn independently, and any of the pre-reading of (a) to (c) above is performed. It is determined whether to execute the notice effect or not to execute the prefetch notice effect itself. In other words, at least one look-ahead notice effect of the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change can appear (the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change can appear independently). .

  Therefore, even if the “previous change system” look-ahead notice effect appears, the “variation start change system” look-ahead notice effect does not necessarily appear, and vice versa. Even if the “system” prefetching notice effect appears, the “previous change system” prefetching notice effect does not necessarily appear. In addition, a pre-reading notice effect of “change system at winning (holding display changing system)” and a pre-reading notice effect of “change system at start of change (image display changing system)” may occur simultaneously. In addition, it is not necessary to configure any of the execution modes (b) to (c) above, and at the time of the pre-reading notice, only the winning change system (holding display changing system) is executed, (Indication display change system) only, or both the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change are always executed. The execution form can be determined as appropriate. Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be displayed by other directing means. You may comprise so that it can be taken out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the pre-reading notice effect mode woven by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the ornamental symbol is being varied and displayed), the upper start opening 34 is won to win the special symbol 1 side operation holding ball. Suppose that the number has become three, and among the third, the action holding ball on which the second movement start operation is executed is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (in this case, the pre-reading notice lottery and change of the winning change system) This shows a case in which a winning change was made in the pre-change notice lottery at the start. In addition, here, it is assumed that the first operation hold ball previously held and the third operation hold ball held later are operation hold balls that have not been pre-selected for the pre-reading notice lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, the production control unit 24 displays a hold display of the second operation hold ball that has been subject to the pre-read notice, and a hold display dedicated to pre-read that is different from normal (hereinafter, “dedicated hold display”). (Referred to as). At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the pre-reading notice is maintained as a normal hold display (hereinafter referred to as “normal hold display”). In the figure, when the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball subject to the pre-reading notice is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (◯) mark) to the dedicated hold display (hatched circle). Show. This notifies the player that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. FIG. 1 (1) shows that the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is finished and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “246” (the result is “lost”).

  The game progresses to (2) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation reservation ball on the special symbol 1 side which is the first (oldest operation reservation ball). The action control ball 24 digests the action hold ball, and the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each action hold ball to the left with the start of the special symbol variation display game. It is set as the hold display mode which shows the state digested by one, and the decoration symbol fluctuation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system”, a background image for the pre-reading notice effect (for example, a lightning effect by displaying a lightning image simulating lightning: a dedicated notice image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Display. Thereby, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

  Then, the game progresses to FIG. 3 (3), and the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is terminated and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with “351” (the result is “lost”).

  Subsequently, the game progresses to FIG. 4 (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation holding ball, that is, the operation holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The action control unit 24 starts and digests the operation hold ball, and at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left, respectively. The decorative symbol variation display game based on the actuated holding ball is started. At this time, the “dedicated hold display” of the change system at the time of winning disappears from the screen at the time of the shift, and is terminated when the current symbol variation display game is started (with the digestion of the operation hold ball). In addition, a special notice image (in this case, lightning effect) of the change system at the start of the change is ended at the end of the generation in the symbol change display game. FIG. 4 (4) shows the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In this way, a series of pre-reading notice effects has been completed. After that, if there is a roaring effect (pseudo-ream or reach effect (SP reach)) that increases the chances of winning the winning prize during this symbol variation display game, the expectation for the big hit is combined with the contents of the pre-reading notice effect. The feeling will be further enhanced.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate the pre-reading notice effect as described above as one aspect of the continuous notice effect. Thereby, since the variation of production can be made rich, the fun of the game can be improved.

(6. Effects related to hit games: FIGS. 32 and 33)
Next, a description will be given of effects that can appear during a hit game.

  The appearance modes during winning games include “opening effects”, “round effects (round start effects, in-round effects, round end effects)” and “ending effects” that appear according to the progress of the winning games. In addition to “medium production”, “big prize opening prize production (production related to big prize opening prize)” that appears when winning a big prize opening is included. The grand prize opening prize production includes a big prize opening normal prize production and an over prize production.

  The above “over winning effect” is different from the notice effect during the symbol variation display game, and is the maximum condition that closes the big winning port during the opening and closing operation of the big winning port during the game (the big winning port winning validity period) It is defined as an effect mode that is executed on condition that there is a prize (over prize) exceeding the number of prizes (for example, 9). The winning ball related to this over winning is referred to as “over winning ball”.

  The handling of over winning balls differs depending on the big hit type and the small hit type. In the case of a win game based on the big win type, a “round game” is executed. Therefore, in one round game, a game ball detected exceeding the maximum number of winnings, which is the closing condition of the big winning opening, is “over winning”. It is treated as a “ball”, and the over winning effect is executed on the condition that this over winning ball is generated. However, in the case of a hit game based on the small hit type (small hit game), as already explained, there is no control of a round game like the big hit type, and a “pseudo round game” that simulates a round game is executed. It has come to be. Therefore, in the case of the small win type, as in the case of the big win type, a game ball detected exceeding the maximum number of winnings, which is the closing condition of the big winning opening in one round game, is treated as an “over winning ball”. Rather than playing a game ball that exceeds the maximum number of winnings, which is the condition for the end of the small hit game, throughout the small hit game, it is treated as an "over winning ball", and this over winning is a condition. Over-winning effects are executed.

  As a typical case where the over-winning occurs, for example, a game ball that will reach the maximum number of winnings has entered the big winning opening, but until the gaming ball is detected by the winning detection switch, Alternatively, the game ball is detected by the winning detection switch, and one or more game balls are accidentally inserted into the big winning opening immediately before the closing of the big winning opening. In this case, even if the game ball that will reach the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) is detected by the winning detection switch (the 9th winning) and the big winning opening is shifted to the closed state, The game ball still remains. When this remaining game ball is detected within the remaining ball discharge time, an over-winning ball exceeding the maximum number of winnings (9th winning) is generated, and this over-winning ball (the 10th and subsequent winning balls) (Winning) will be the target of “over winning effect”.

  In addition, the rate of occurrence of over-winnings is mainly based on the layout of gaming members on the game board (for example, the layout of prize holes, center decorations, etc., gauge configuration (arrangement of game nails), etc.) Although it is affected by the form (for example, the path length to the detection switch formed inside the special winning opening) and the opening / closing operation pattern of the special winning opening (for example, the length of the maximum opening time), it is an unexpected special prize in design. In order to prevent the occurrence of numbers, generally, the rate of occurrence is suppressed, and over-winning does not easily occur. In this embodiment, exclusively the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, that is, the round game is executed in the long opening pattern (maximum opening time long opening time), or the short opening pattern (the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is Depending on whether it is executed with a short opening time, it is greatly affected by whether or not an overwinning occurs. In the case of a long opening pattern, an overwinning can be expected, but in the case of a short opening pattern, an overwinning occurs. Cannot be expected.

  However, depending on the model (arrangement configuration of game members on the game board surface), it is possible to intentionally strike the occurrence of an overwinning by skillfully adjusting the strength of the game ball launch (the player's launch operation handle 15 There are things that can increase the over-winning rate more than the normal launch method by operating technology, but it is not necessarily aimed at. Therefore, the occurrence of an over-winning gives the player a sense of profit that “unexpected profit has been obtained” exclusively. Paying attention to this point, when an over-winning event occurs, an “over-winning effect” that informs that effect will be displayed to congratulate the player, thereby giving satisfaction to the over-winning event. Can be done.

  Regarding the winning ball for the big winning opening, during the “Large winning opening winning period” from the opening of the winning opening until the “remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms)” set after the closing condition is established. The one detected by the winning detection switch (the lower large winning opening sensor 42a or the right large winning opening sensor 52a) related to the large winning opening is the target of the winning count.

  In the present embodiment, the right large winning opening is formed more easily than the lower large winning opening 40 so that the over winning is easily generated. However, in order to prevent excessive over-winning from occurring even within the above-mentioned big winning opening prize valid period, the number of over winning prizes for the lower large winning opening 40 is limited to about 2 in one round game. In addition, the number of over winnings for the right big winning opening 50 is designed to be about 3 as a limit. In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the number of over winnings for the lower major winning opening 40 and the number of over winnings for the right large winning opening 50 can be up to three.

  The number of winning a prize winning opening is managed by the main control unit 20 based on the detection information of the winning detection switch (the lower winning prize sensor 42a or the right major winning opening sensor 52a) relating to the winning prize opening (see below). 20 step S564 and FIG. 22 step S604). When the main control unit 20 detects a winning ball to the big winning opening, and when it is less than or equal to the maximum number of winnings, the main controlling unit 20 sends an effect control command for normal winning (ordinary large winning opening winning command) to the effect controlling unit 24. Send. However, when the maximum number of winnings is exceeded (when over-winning occurs), an over-winning effect control command (an OV winning big prize opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step of FIG. 20 described later). S565, see steps S606 and S607 in FIG. 22).

  On the basis of these commands, the production control unit 24 displays the “big prize opening normal prize production” for the winning balls until the maximum number of winnings is exceeded, and the “over winning production” for the winning balls related to the over winning. ] Can be displayed (see FIGS. 22, 27A to 29B, and FIGS. 32 to 34 described later). In the case of the present embodiment, since there are a plurality of types of big prize opening, the normal big prize opening prize command and the OV winning big prize opening prize command are, as shown in FIG. A command corresponding to the right big prize opening 50 is transmitted. That is, the “ordinary winning prize winning command (large winning prize winning command 1, 2)” designates the winning prize type and the occurrence of no over winning prize. The “winning mouth winning command 3, 4)” is a command for designating a large winning mouth type and occurrence of over winning. As a result, the production control unit 24 can grasp which of the big winning entries has been won, and can display the winning effects according to each of the big winning entries.

  Here, the “over winning” can only occur during a round game in which a large winning opening opening time that can sufficiently reach the maximum winning number is set. In the present embodiment, there is a high possibility that an over winning will occur during a round game in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a long opening time (for example, 29.8 seconds). On the other hand, during a round game in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a short opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), it is not possible to assume an over winning due to the performance of the launching device 32 and the game nail. .

  Therefore, execution / non-execution of the over winning effect can be determined according to the hit type. This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32 (a) is an explanatory diagram relating to the over-winning effect of the hit type on the special figure 1 side, and FIG. 33 (a) is an explanatory diagram relating to the over-winning effect of the hit type on the special figure 2 side.

  Referring to FIGS. 32 (a) and 33 (a), the hit type for executing the short release pattern round game, specifically, 2R short open latent large hit, 2R short open non-probable large hit, small hit A Or, since the small win B is a hit type for which it is not assumed that an over-winning effect can occur, these wins are excluded from the execution of the over-winning effect.

  On the other hand, the hit type for executing the round game of the long open pattern, specifically, the 5R long open probability variable big hit, the 5R long open non-probable big hit, the 12R long open non-probable big hit, the 12R long open positive variable big hit, or the 16R long open positive variable big hit Since the big win is a hit type that can generate an over-winning effect, these winning games are targeted for the over-winning effect. However, in the case of 12R long open non-probable big hit, round games with long open patterns are executed for round games 1R to 10R, and round games with short open patterns are executed for 11R to 12R. Over-winning effects are not executed for eyes.

  As described above, paying attention to the winning type in which an over-winning can occur, if an over-winning occurs, it is possible to determine whether or not to transmit an OV winning big winning opening winning command according to the winning type. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not to transmit the OV winning big prize winning command according to special symbol determination data (data for identifying the winning type) described later. As described above, the configuration for transmitting the OV winning big prize winning command according to the winning type has the following advantages.

  For example, when developing a new model, even if a specific game type that is likely to cause an over-winning game is executed, an over-winning effect will be displayed for that specific game type for reasons such as gaming. Sometimes you do n’t want to. In this case, in the configuration in which the over winning effect is simply displayed depending on whether or not the maximum number of winnings has been exceeded, it is necessary to add a program for excluding that specific winning type from the execution target of the over winning effect. Moreover, it is necessary to add or delete a program each time a hit type is added or changed. As a result, a significant program change is required for each model, which may cause a delay in the development period. However, in the case of determining whether or not to transmit the OV winning big prize winning command based on the winning type (special symbol determination data described later), in the case of a specific winning type, the OV winning big winning prize winning command is If no specific hit type is provided, and a winning prize winning command for OV winning can be transmitted for all hit types, it is relatively easy to change the model without changing the program to a dark cloud. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be changed and has excellent compatibility and versatility between old and new models.

  In the case of this embodiment, when an overwinning occurs, an effect control command for overwinning (an OV winning big prize opening prize command) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. There are advantages.

  Typically, the main control unit 20 transmits an effect control command (hereinafter referred to as “winning number command”) corresponding to the number of winnings of the big winning opening, and based on the winning number information included in the winning number command. The case of the gaming machine A that controls the over winning effect will be described as an example.

  In the gaming machine A having the above-described configuration, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of types of winning number commands in consideration of the number of over winning prizes at the main control unit 20 side. If the case of this embodiment is demonstrated to an example, for example, since the number of over-winnings with respect to the right big winning opening 50 is designed with a limit of about 3 in general, considering the maximum over-winning number of 3, It is necessary to prepare a total of 12 types of large winning opening command corresponding to the maximum winning number +3, that is, 1 to 12 large winning opening winning numbers. Then, the production control unit 24 side determines whether or not the maximum number of winnings 9 has been exceeded (whether or not an over winning has occurred) based on the winning number information included in the large winning opening winning number command, An effect control process is performed such that an over-winning effect appears when the number exceeds nine. However, in the configuration like the gaming machine A, the following problems occur.

  Based on the gaming machine A, when developing a new model B with a different maximum number of winnings (for example, the maximum number of winnings is 10), over-winning that was used in the gaming machine A on the production control unit 24 side. It is necessary to change the process of “whether or not the maximum number of winnings has been exceeded” to the process of “whether or not the maximum number of winnings has been exceeded” that is the determination condition of the above.

  On the main control unit 20 side, it is necessary to prepare a big prize opening number command of a different type from the gaming machine A as the big prize opening number command. If the case of this embodiment is demonstrated to an example, for example, the number of over winning prizes for the right big winning opening 50 will be considered, and the type of the big winning opening prize command related to the new model B is the same as that of the gaming machine A described above. It is necessary to prepare a total of 13 types of prize winning number commands corresponding to the number of winning prizes 1 to 13, which is more than 12 types. Also, when transmitting the winning prize winning number command, it is necessary to check the winning number of the winning prize, select the winning prize command corresponding to the winning number, and transmit this to the effect control unit 24 side. There is.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, on the main control unit 20 side, when the number of winnings is less than or equal to the maximum number of winnings, only the “ordinary big winning opening winning command” is transmitted regardless of the number of winnings, and the maximum winnings are achieved. When the number exceeds the number, the simple configuration is such that only the “OV winning prize winning command” is transmitted regardless of the number of winnings, and the effect control unit 24 displays an over winning effect. When issuing a command, it is determined only whether the received command is a “OV winning prize winning command” or not, and if the received command is an OV winning big prize winning command, an over winning effect will be given. It is possible to display the winning effect related to the big winning opening by a simple effect process such as controlling the appearance of the game, otherwise not displaying the over winning effect.

  In short, the command transmission form on the main control unit 20 side is as follows. If the relation of “maximum winning number (N) <large winning prize winning counter” is not satisfied, the normal big winning prize winning command is In the case where the relationship is transmitted and the relationship is satisfied, an OV winning big prize winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see step S607 in FIG. 22 described later). In this embodiment, since it is such a command transmission form, for example, when developing a new model B having a different maximum winning number from the gaming machine A, the above-mentioned “N” that specifies the maximum winning number is specified. It is only necessary to change the value of “number” from 9 to 10. As a result, it is possible to change the model relatively easily without changing the program related to the over-winning effect to a dark cloud, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine with excellent compatibility and versatility between old and new models.

(6-1. Directive for winning a prize)
Next, with reference to FIG. 32 (B) and FIG. 33 (B), the “big winning opening normal winning effect” and the “over winning effect”, which are the effects related to the winning prize opening, will be described in detail.

  FIG. 32 (B) and FIG. 33 (B) exemplify an effect selection table for selecting an effect mode appearing at the time of winning a grand prize. The illustrated sound effects A-0 to A-2 and B-0 to B-3 are effect data for sound effects, and the light effects A-0 to A-1 and B-0 to B-3 are effects for light effects. Data, movable body effect (effects by movable body accessory) A-1, B-1 to B-3 are effect data for operation of the movable body accessory. Note that different production data are defined for different production data numbers. That is, different effects appear in the light effects A-0 to A-1 and B-0 to B-3 having different effect numbers.

  In the present embodiment, there are two types of big prize winning openings, the lower grand prize winning opening 40 and the right big winning prize opening 50. When winning in these big winning prize openings, image production, light production, sound production, etc. The winning effect corresponding to each big winning opening (big winning opening winning effect) can be displayed.

(6-1-1. Grand prize opening normal prize production)
Next, the special winning opening normal winning effect will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the “large winning opening normal winning effect” is made to appear as a winning effect for winning balls up to the maximum number of winnings, that is, before winning over.

  As for the image production related to the normal winning prize production, for example, the “in-round winning number notification effect (for example, character information, pattern, icon image, etc.) for notifying the number of big prize winning prizes in the currently running round game. “An effect mode for notifying information on the number of winning prizes” or “An acquired ball number notifying effect (first acquired ball number notifying effect: (for example, character information) for notifying an acquired ball number V acquired by a player during a winning game”. Is a production mode for informing information on the number of acquired balls))). Each time the “winning ball number V” is awarded to a winning opening (general winning opening 43, upper starting opening 34, lower starting opening 35, large winning opening 40, 50, etc.), it is associated with the winning opening The cumulative number of winning balls obtained by sequentially adding the number of winning balls may be displayed as the number of winning balls V, or the number of cumulative winning balls obtained by sequentially adding the number of winning balls (13) when winning the winning prize openings 40 and 50. May be displayed as the acquired number of balls V.

  In addition, regarding the “acquired ball number notification effect” described above, the number of acquired balls in the so-called “continuous chain” by continuously winning a big hit during a game state (in the probability variation state or in a short time state) with electric support is informed. It is possible. Specifically, the number of winning balls by winning in the current winning game is added to the number V of winning balls by the previous winning game, and this is displayed as the acquired number of balls V in the consecutive game. For example, if the number V of balls acquired by the previous hit game is “1560 shots”, and if a big hit is made again in a state where there is electric support thereafter, the current hit game is being played against the 1560 shots. The number of award balls from the winning of is added and displayed.

  As for the sound production and the light production, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the prize is awarded at the lower university winning opening 40, the sound production A-0 and the light production A-0 appear, and the right production is performed. When winning the big prize opening 50, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the sound effect B-0 and the light effect B-0 appear. This special winning opening normal winning effect is such that a different effect appears depending on each big winning port, and there is a case where it is notified which of the big winning ports has been won. Thereby, the production effect at the time of winning the grand prize opening can be enhanced.

(6-2. Over winning effect)
In this embodiment, an “over winning effect” is displayed as a winning effect for a winning ball when the maximum number of winnings is exceeded. This over-winning effect is an effect mode that uses the motion mode of the movable object in addition to the image effect, the sound effect, the light effect, and the like. First, the over winning effect for the lower university winning opening 40 will be described.

(6-2-1. Over winning effect related to Shimodai winning port 40: FIG. 32 (b))
As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the over winning effect for the lower prize winning opening 40 is an effect mode that exclusively uses a sound effect and a light effect. However, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, as one aspect of the over-winning effect, a probability change notification effect (details will be described later) using the clock hands 97 of the clock-type accessory appears.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), different over winning effects appear depending on the number of over winning (over winning number in 1R). Specifically, when there are 1 to 2 over winnings (see columns “+1” and “+2” in the figure), the light effect A-1 appears regardless of the number of over winnings. With regard to the sound production, different sound productions A-1 to A-2 appear with one or two over winnings respectively. As a result, different over-winning effects appear depending on the number of over-winnings. For example, in the case of jackpot type, the player can know how many overwinnings have been made in this round game. It has become. Note that the sound production only differs depending on the number of over-wins, because the players can hear that there are multiple over-wins, so that other players around the game can feel superior. This is because satisfaction can be obtained.

  Although not shown in the figure, as an image effect related to over-winning, the above-mentioned “in-round winning number notification effect” is used, and when an over-winning occurs, “'over-winning number in current round game” And / or “accumulated number of winnings (accumulated number of over winning balls)” obtained by accumulating the number of over winnings in each round game may be configured to be notified (OV winning number notification effect).

(Number of balls won by over winning)
Also, many players want to know the number of balls won (the number of prize balls) due to over-winning. Therefore, when an over winning is generated, as one aspect of the “acquired ball number notification effect”, the number of acquired balls due to an over winning (the total number of winning balls by an over winning) may be notified. Specifically, in addition to the “acquired number of balls V1” which is the current total number of acquired balls (total number of winning balls) including the number of acquired balls (number of winning balls) due to over winning, U (OV winning number acquisition number) 'can be displayed ("acquired ball number V1, acquired ball number U" notification: second acquired ball number notification effect). For example, the text information of “875 GET” for the “acquired ball count V1” and “39 GET! For the“ acquired ball count U ”! The character information of “the number of prize balls (indicating 13 × 3 shots = 39 shots)” can be displayed. In this case, it is possible to notify the number of OV winning winnings out of the total winning balls. Hereinafter, the notification effect targeting the number of acquired balls U due to over winning is referred to as “OV acquisition number notification effect”.

  Also, instead of 'acquired ball number V1' including the number U of winning balls due to over winning as described above, 'acquired ball number V2' (semi-acquired ball number) excluding the winning ball number due to over winning, The acquired number of balls U ′ may be notified (“acquired number of balls V2, acquired number of balls U” notification: third acquired number of balls notification effect). Specifically, the text information of “836 GETs (acquired ball number V1−acquired ball number U)” targeted for the “acquired ball number V2” and “+39 shots GET” targeted for the acquired ball number U. ! "Can be displayed.

  In addition to the above-mentioned “acquired ball count V2” and “acquired ball count U”, a total of three types of acquired ball counts including “acquired ball count V1” obtained by adding these values may be notified (“ “Acquired ball number V1, acquired ball number V2, acquired ball number U” notification: fourth acquired ball number notification effect). For example, the character information of “836 GET” targeting “acquired ball number V2”, the character information of “39 GET” targeting the acquired ball number U, and the target ball number V1 “ 836 + 39 = 875 GET !! ”can be displayed.

  In this way, by displaying the number of winning balls related to over winning in an easy-to-understand manner, it becomes easier for the player to grasp information related to over winning (over winning number, cumulative winning number, or winning number U due to over winning), Attract attention to over-winning prizes. However, it is preferable not to display information related to over-winning when no over-winning has occurred. If a display such as “+0 GET” is displayed from the stage where no over-winning has occurred, it is emphasized that no over-winning has occurred, and the player's willingness to play may be reduced. Because there is.

  In addition, about each display aspect (OV winning number alerting | reporting effect, 2nd-4th acquired ball number alerting | reporting effect) regarding the number of acquired balls mentioned above, it may apply also to the over winning effect concerning the right big winning opening 50. it can.

(6-2-1 (I). Probability notification effect (special effect))
Next, the probability change notification effect will be described. In the present embodiment, a chance change notification lottery is executed in response to the occurrence of an over-winning, and when this lottery is won, a probability change notification effect for notifying that the current jackpot type is a probability change jackpot type comes to appear. Yes.

  In the present embodiment, when “12R long open probability variable big hit” or “12R long open non-probable big hit” with a relatively large number of round games is won among the hit types to be big hit lottery on the special figure 1 side, In the display game, a display result for concealing the hit type (whether it is a probable big hit or not) is derived. Specifically, in the symbol variation display game (decoration symbol variation display game), if the probability variation jackpot type (for example, 16R long open probability variation jackpot or 5R long release probability variation jackpot), the combination of the decorative symbols (game symbols) is “777”. ”Or“ 333 ”odd symbol combinations (here, odd odd symbol combinations) are derived and displayed as display results to make the probability variation big hit clear, and the non-probability big hit type (for example, 5R length open) (Non-probable variable big hit), a combination of even numbers such as “222” and “444” is derived and displayed as a display result so that the non-probable big hit is made clear.

  However, when “12R long open probability change big hit” or “12R long open not probable big hit” is won, the display result for concealing whether or not it is a probable big hit is different from, for example, “777” and “333” above. A combination of odd symbols (for example, “111” or “555”) is derived and displayed as a display result, and the current hit type is concealed. In the “winning effect” during the winning game, it is possible to notify whether or not the current hit type is a probable big hit.

  The “winning effect” includes the “opening effect” at the start of the big hit, the “round effect (round start effect, the effect during the round, the end effect)” during the round game, the “inter-round effect” between the round games, and Consists of “ending effects” after the end of the final round game. And, in the winning effect of “12R probable big hit game” by the 12R long open probable big hit and “12R non probable big hit game” by the 12R long open non-probable big hit, the opening effect is mainly based on the image display on the liquid crystal display device 36. ~ "Story style (story style)" production (story style production) with narrative relevance through ending production has been developed. Here, a production mode that mimics a situation where an ally character (player side character) and an enemy character confront each other, specifically, a hero character and an enemy character develop a battle and are developed during the battle. A so-called “battle effect (battle effect)” is provided that gives the player the pleasure of guessing the type of jackpot that has been won this time depending on the content of the effect and the battle results. As the battle effect, a battle effect imitating a fleet battle in which the own ship (hero character) and the enemy ship (enemy character) develop a naval battle appears.

  Here, the 12R probability variation big hit game and the 12R non-probability big hit game have the same operation mode during the hit game in the first half (1R to 10R) as already described. For this reason, in the round game in the first half, it is difficult or impossible to discriminate which hit game is attributed to which big hit even by looking at the mechanical game operation appearing on the appearance. In the present embodiment, paying attention to the big hit game operation mode in which the first half of the 12R probability variation big hit game and the 12R non-probable big hit game are the same, the development of the hit performance in the first half round game according to the type of the big hit In addition to the change, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of guessing the type of jackpot that has been won this time, based on the development of the hit effect and the result of the effect. Here, at the 10th round, which is the final round of the first half, a notification is made as to whether or not it is a probable big hit as an effect result of the battle effect.

  As described above, the battle performance result may be carried over to the 10th R, but there are many players who want to be relieved to know if it is a promising big hit earlier than that, since the final round Informing the player before this is also preferable in order to enhance the gaming interest, and the effect of producing a big hit game is also enhanced.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a “probability change notification lottery” is executed based on the occurrence of an over-winning in the 12R probability change big hit game, and when this is won, a predetermined production means (in this embodiment, a clock type) The “probability notification effect” using the clockwork 97 of the accessory is displayed. Specifically, a probability variation notification lottery is executed based on the fact that an over winning has occurred in the first half of the round game, except for the 10th round where the battle performance result is known, and the probability variation notification effect is displayed based on the lottery result similarity. Let it come out. The probability change notification lottery is executed by the “over-winning probability change lottery means” which the production control unit 24 has as its function unit.

  On the side of the production control unit 24, when the “OV winning prize winning command” is received during the 12R probability changing big hit game, the probability changing notification lottery is executed. Then, when the probability variation notification lottery is won, the clock hands 97 are controlled in a predetermined operation mode, and this is displayed as the probability variation notification effect (the effect of the movable body effect A-1 in FIG. 32 (b)). Data is selected). For example, a probable change notification effect such as rotating the clock hands 97 at high speed appears to congratulate the player.

  The effect means (here, the clock hand 97) used for the probability change notification effect serves as “specific information notification means” for notifying whether or not the current hit type is the probability change big win based on the result of the probability change notification lottery. . The clock hand 97 of the present embodiment is used not only for the probability change notification effect but also as an effect means when a specific effect appears in the symbol variation display game.

  Note that the probability of executing the probability change notification effect by the probability change notification lottery is not particularly limited, and can be freely determined according to game play. For example, it is possible to win with a probability of 20% per over winning. In addition, the winning probabilities can be varied according to the number of over winnings in one round. For example, in the case of “over winning + 1 (over winning 1)”, it is possible to win with a probability of 10%, and in the case of “over winning + 2 (2 over winning)”, it is possible to win.

  However, in the case of the present embodiment, the probability variation notification lottery is executed each time an over winning is generated during the 1R to 8R round games. The 9R is excluded because it is determined whether or not the next 10R is a probable big hit based on the result of the battle performance, and thus it is not necessary to notify the 9R immediately before.

  Then, when winning the probability variation notification lottery, the probability variation notification effect using at least the operation mode of the clock hand 97 appears instead of the “normal over winning effect” at the time of not winning the probability variation notification lottery. ing. In addition, the clock hands 97 may be operated in a predetermined operation mode together with the normal over winning effect (here, the light effect and the sound effect). In this case, a normal over winning effect and a probability change notification effect are produced in an overlapping manner.

  Further, in addition to the probability variation notification lottery, the probability variation notification is based on the cumulative number of over winning balls (which means the total (cumulative) number of over winning balls generated in the first to eighth rounds in which the probability variation notification effect is executed). It is good also as the structure which makes a production appear. For example, until the cumulative number of over-winning balls reaches a predetermined number (cumulative number ≦ predetermined number (for example, 3)), the probability change notification lottery is executed, and the cumulative number of over-winning balls exceeds the predetermined number (Predetermined number <cumulative number), it is possible to make sure that a certain change notification effect appears. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which shows a probability change alerting | presentation effect based on the cumulative number of over-winning balls without depending on the probability change alert lottery. For example, when the cumulative number of over-winning balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, three: cumulative number = predetermined number), the probability change notification effect can be surely displayed.

  In the above description, a configuration has been described in which a probability change notification effect can be produced during a 12R probability variation big hit game, based on the relationship between the 12R length open probability change big hit and the 12R long open probability change big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as long as it is possible to set the current hit type in a concealed state based on the display result of the symbol variation display game, the action mode of the hit game, and the effect mode of the hit game, any of them can be applied to the present invention. Can do. In the case of the present embodiment, for example, from the relationship between the 5R long open probability change big hit and the 5R long open not probable big hit, the probability change notification effect can be displayed during the 5R positive change big hit game.

  In this embodiment, not only a normal over-winning effect when an over-winning occurs (over-winning effect when the notice lottery is not won) but also a “special over-winning effect (probability change notification effect)” based on the over-winning appears. It is configured to be able to notify the fact that an over winning has occurred according to the contents of the effect, and can also notify specific game information that the player wants to know (in this case, information on whether or not a probable big hit) Yes. Thereby, the player is actively aiming for an overwinning, and the technical intervention for the big hit game can be increased, so that the fun of the game can be improved. In the case of the present embodiment, since the big hit type information can be notified due to over winning, in addition to giving the player a sense of superiority due to the increase in the number of winning balls for the over winning, It can also give you a sense of tension. As a result, it is possible to greatly improve the fun of the game at the time of overwinning and to prevent the big hit game from becoming monotonous. In addition, the configuration in which the game information that the player wants to know based on the occurrence of an over-winning, such as the above-described probability change notification effect, is particularly satisfactory for intermediate to advanced game players. It is preferable because it can provide a sense of playability.

(6-2-2. Over winning effect for the right big winning opening 50: FIG. 33 (b))
Next, the over winning effect related to the right big winning opening 50 will be described.

  Unlike the case of the Shimodai prize opening 40, the over winning prize for the right big prize opening 50 is exclusively a sound production, a light production, and a movable body production (visual production according to the operation mode of the flower-shaped accessory 98). This is a production aspect used, and this is different from the case of the lower prize winning opening 40 described above.

  The reason why the movable body effect is included in the over winning effect relating to the right big prize opening 50 is that the right big prize opening 50 side is formed more easily than the lower big prize opening 40 side, In consideration of the fact that the opening side of the mouth 50 is a case where a hit type of relatively high profit is won for the player, the effect effect during the hit game is enhanced, and the player is further improved. This is to give a sense of superiority and satisfaction. In order to enhance the visual effect at the time of over-winning, the flower-shaped handpiece 98 of the present embodiment is not used as a directing means during the symbol variation display game like the clock hand 97, and is dedicated to the over-winning effect. It is used as a production means. In addition, the flower-shaped accessory 98 is a movable object that notifies the occurrence of an over-winning, so that it is configured to execute various modes of operation than the clock hands 97 and has a higher visual effect. It is configured as.

  Referring to FIG. 33 (b), the over-winning effect relating to the right big prize opening 50 appears differently depending on the number of over-winnings in the same manner as the over-winning effect relating to the lower big prize opening 40. It has come to be. Specifically, when the over winning is 1 to 3 (see the columns of “+1 (first over winning number)” to “+3 (third over winning number)” in the figure), Light effects B-0 to B-3 appear according to the number of over winning prizes (+1 to +3), and sound effects B-1 to B-3 appear as sound effects. Therefore, in the case of the right big prize opening 50, different light effects and sound effects appear according to the number of over winning prizes. Similarly, for the movable body effect by the flower-shaped accessory 98, different movable body effects appear depending on the number of over winning prizes. Specifically, when there are 1 to 3 overwinnings, the movable body effects B-1 to B-3 appear according to the number of overwinnings. As for the movable body effect, for example, in the case of the movable body effect B-1, only the petal portion or the flower heart and the petal part are moved back and forth, and in the case of the movable body effect B-2, the movable body effect is moved to the left and right. In the case of production B-3, it moves up and down.

  In the present embodiment, only the petal portion or the flower heart and the petal portion are moved back and forth, left and right, or up and down in the case of winning over, but instead, the entire flower-shaped accessory 98 or only the petal portion. Or, the flower heart and the petal part rotate a little, for example, a structure that moves forward by rotating 1/12 turn, or the flower heart and petal part that is the front part falls down at a high speed in the vertical direction and advances one step. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that moves back to the original position at a predetermined number of steps or moves up and down. Note that the movement of the movable body portion of the flower-shaped accessory 98 is limited to two short-time motion systems such as back-and-forth, left-and-right and up-and-down inching, rotation and dropping. If there is a configuration in which, for example, the entire flower-shaped accessory 98 or the petal portion is rotated half or one turn corresponding to the case where there are over winnings, the effect when one over winning prize opening is generated is 2 This is because it is considered to be too long for an effect corresponding to the performance of the individual. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, for example, the whole of the flower-shaped accessory 98 or the petal portion is rotated halfway or once in response to the case where there are two consecutive overwinnings.

  In the present embodiment, different light effects, sound effects, and movable object effects appear according to the number of over winning prizes, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, (1) according to the number of over winning prizes, at least one of a light effect, a sound effect, and a movable object effect can be set as a different effect mode. For example, as in the case of the lower prize winning opening 40, the light effect is the same effect mode regardless of the number of over winning prizes, and the sound effect and / or the movable body effect is different depending on the number of over winning prizes. Can do. In this case, since the movable body effect has a high visual effect, it is preferable that the light effect and the sound effect are the same, and the movable object effect appears different depending on the number of over winnings.

  Also, (2) When the number of over winnings is less than a predetermined number (for example, a predetermined number <3), “First effect mode (for example, in the case of +1 to +2, light effect, sound effect, and movable body) If the number is greater than or equal to the predetermined number (for example, 3 ≦ predetermined number), the “second effect mode (for example, light effect, sound effect, and movable object effect) is displayed. A production mode in which at least any one of them is different) ”can appear.

(6-2-2 (A). Cumulative number display effect: FIG. 34)
In addition, in the over winning effect related to the right big winning opening 50, it is possible to notify the cumulative number of over winning balls generated through the current winning game (hereinafter referred to as "over winning cumulative number") using a clock-type accessory. It is configured. Specifically, the over-winning cumulative number can be notified using a clock-type accessory (number display unit 80, clock hand 97). This notification mode of the over-winning cumulative number is referred to as “cumulative number display effect”.

  The “clock-type accessory” according to the present embodiment has a function of performing the following three operations when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when an over-winning to a big winning opening occurs during a winning game. Yes. The first function is a function to congratulate the player by rotating the clock hand 97 of the clock-type accessory around the high speed when winning the “probability change notification lottery” as described above. The other two functions relate the “color and number” of the number sector 80a to be colored with the “cumulative number of winning prizes over winning prizes” in the winning game. That is, the second function is that the number of the number sector 80a pointed to by the short hand of the stopped clock hand 97 is incremented by one step or a plurality of steps on the number display unit 80 every time an over-winning is made during the winning game. Then, while the cumulative number of over winnings is notified, the LED of the number sector 80a is displayed in the normal color (the light emission state when no over winning is generated: , White) and a different color (for example, yellow), thereby congratulating the player. In the third function, when the second function is used, the clock hand 97 (short hand) is incremented on the numeric display unit 80 for each over-winning, and the over-winning cumulative number reaches a predetermined cumulative number. For example, when the maximum number of 12 that can be displayed on the number display unit 80 is exceeded, the number sector of the Roman numeral “I” is pointed again by the short hand of the clock hand 97, and the LED of the number sector 80a is emitted in rainbow color. Or, it is a function of celebrating the player by causing the entire LED of the number display unit 80 to emit light in rainbow colors.

  A specific operation example is as follows. In the present embodiment, the long hand and the short hand are moved to the position indicating exactly 12 o'clock (XII) at the start of the hit game, and all the numeric sectors 80a hold the “white” light emitting display mode of the off state or the initial color. This state is a normal state, that is, a notification mode with an over-winning cumulative number of zero.

  If an over-winning occurs, the number sector of “I” shines yellow when the over-winning cumulative number is 1, and only the short hand of the clock hand 97 advances by one step to indicate “I”. When the number is two, the number sectors 80a of “I” and “II” shine yellow, the short hand of the clock hand 97 advances one step to indicate “II”, and when the over-winning cumulative number is three “I” to “III” are colored yellow, and the short hand of the clock hand 97 advances by one step to indicate “III”,... When the over-winning cumulative number is 12, “I” to “XII” The number sector 80a is lit yellow, the short hand of the clock hand 97 goes around once and points to "XII" again, and so on, using the number sectors "I" to "XII" Is configured to be able to notify up to twelve. In addition, when the over-winning cumulative number exceeds 12, it is assumed that the over-winning cumulative number exceeds the predetermined number, and in order to specially congratulate the player, the number sector is emitted from yellow to a premium rainbow color, In this case, the number sector 80a of “I” shines in rainbow color, and only the short hand of the clock hand 97 advances by one step to indicate “I”. When the number is 14, only the short hand of the clock hand 97 advances by one step and performs a series of operations such as pointing to “II”, so that a total of 24 can be finally counted.

  In the present embodiment, during the round game, the right grand prize opening 50 is designed to have a limit of approximately three over-winning cumulative numbers. However, during all round games, the three or more over-winnings are designed. Since it is difficult to assume that there is a maximum of 24 over winning prizes, only the cumulative number of over winning prizes is reported. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be able to notify this in consideration of the upper limit number of the cumulative number of over-winnings in design. For example, assuming that there are three over-winnings in all rounds (16 rounds) in a 16R probability variation big hit game, the cumulative number of over-winnings for 48 may be notified.

  Further, as described above, when the over-winning cumulative number reaches a predetermined number (for example, the cumulative number of 12), the over-winning cumulative number is notified using the number sector 80a, and when the predetermined number is exceeded (the cumulative number 13). In the case of more than one), it is possible to notify that the cumulative number of over winnings exceeds the predetermined number by using at least one of the light effect, the sound effect, and the movable object effect. . In the present embodiment, the cumulative number of over-wins is reported using the number sector 80a, which has a relatively high visual effect. However, instead of the number sector 80a, an image display effect or LED or the like by the liquid crystal display device 36 is used. It may be configured such that the cumulative number of over winning prizes can be notified by a display device such as a seven-segment level meter.

  In addition, every time the cumulative number of over-winnings reaches a predetermined number, it may be notified that the number of winnings has been reached in a predetermined production mode. In this case, the over-winning cumulative number itself is not clearly notified, but an approximate value of the over-winning cumulative number is notified. For example, for every even number of over winning prizes (for example, 2, 4, 6,... 12), at least one of the light effect, the sound effect, and the movable object effect is used. Then, the approximate value of the over-winning cumulative number may be notified. Moreover, it is good also as an effect aspect which changes according to the number of over winning prizes. For example, when the cumulative number of over-wins reaches 2, the first effect mode is 4, the second effect mode is 4, the third effect mode is 6, and the sixth effect is 12. It can be set as the production mode. In addition, when the cumulative number of over winning prizes exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 12), the same effect mode (seventh effect mode) can be used thereafter.

  In addition, when notifying the cumulative number of over winning prizes using a movable body effect, a plurality of types of movable body features are provided, and one of these movable body features is used for the over winning effect, and the other movable body features are overridden. It can be used for notification effects related to the cumulative number of winning prizes.

(6-3. About over-winning effects in error)
Next, the over winning effect in error will be described.

  In the present embodiment, an over-winning effect can be displayed when an over-winning occurs even during an error. Specifically, the fact that an error has occurred by a specific effect means is notified, and the effect means other than the specific effect means among the effect means used for the over-winning effect is notified. It is supposed to be.

  For example, when an error occurs, at least one of a sound effect, a light effect, and an image display effect using a specific decorative lamp 45, speaker 46, liquid crystal display device 36, or the like according to the error type. Thus, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming operation (error notification), and when an over winning occurs during the error, it is used for error notification among the effect means used for the over winning effect. An over-winning effect is performed by using a non-production means (for example, the first movable body accessory (clock hand 97) and / or the second movable body accessory (flower-shaped accessory 98)) It is possible to notify that a winning has occurred. Thereby, the fact that an error has occurred (error type information) and the fact that an over-winning has occurred (including notification of an over-winning number and / or an over-winning cumulative number) can be reported in duplicate. Can do. The reason why the over winning effect is executed even during the error is as follows.

  An error has occurred during the game, but the error may be of an error type (in the case of an error type that allows the game to continue) in which there is no particular problem even if the game is advanced (details on the error type will be described later) To do). For example, even if an error occurs during the hit game, even if the hit game is continued during the error, there is an error type that allows the hit game to continue without causing any particular disadvantage to the player. (For example, a clogging error described later (see FIG. 35)). In the case of such an error type, since the winning game can be continued, naturally, there is a possibility that an over winning will occur. Even in such a case, it is not preferable for a player who wants to obtain a sense of superiority and satisfaction due to over-winning that the over-winning effect is disturbed by the error notification.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when an over winning is generated during an error that allows the game to continue as described above, an error notification is executed, and when an over winning occurs, this can be notified. . More specifically, when an error notification is executed by an effect unit such as the decorative lamp 45, the speaker 46, and the liquid crystal display device 36, and an over winning is generated during the error notification, at least a flower used for the over winning effect. The type combination 98 and the clock type combination (number display unit 80, clock hands 97) are operated in the same manner as in the normal state, thereby notifying that an over winning has occurred. . Thereby, it can be notified that an over-winning has occurred even during an error.

  However, it should not be confused that when an error is in progress, error notification is executed exclusively by a light effect, a sound effect, and / or an image display effect. The production itself does not appear. In the case of this embodiment, in the normal over-winning effect, a light effect, a sound effect, and a movable object effect (which may include an image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 36) are used. At least the moving body effect is used. In short, the effect means is an effect means that is used for both error notification and over-winning effect, but during the error, the effect means that is used for error notification and not used for over-winning effect (first And production means (corresponding to second production means)) that are used for over winning production and are not used for error notification. Such a first effect means is, for example, a decorative lamp 45, a speaker 46, or a liquid crystal display device 36. As a second effect means, a movable object (clock hand 97, flower-shaped accessory) 98) is applicable.

  Therefore, in the case of this embodiment, when an over winning is generated in a normal time (when an error has not occurred), the “normal winning effect mode in a normal time” is a light effect, a sound effect, an image display effect, and a movable object effect. A predetermined over-winning effect is executed, and during an error, an error notification using a light effect, a sound effect, an image display effect, etc. is executed, excluding the movable body effect, among the effects related to the over-winning effect. When an over winning is generated, an over winning effect by a movable body effect that is not used for error notification is executed.

  As described above, in the error notification, the decorative lamp 45, the speaker 46, the liquid crystal display device 36, and the like are used, and the movable body accessory is used for the over winning effect for the following reason.

  The form and operation of the movable object is greatly different for each model, and it is very rare to use the same movable object between the old model and the new model. In contrast, the main body (casing) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or game parts that can be used between the old model and the new model (for example, specific game parts such as the launching device 32 and the game ball dispensing device 19). Are used on a yearly basis, and the old and new models are often used for a long time. That is, the decoration lamp 45, the speaker 46, a specific game part, etc. formed in the main body (housing) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used as they are in the new model. Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the countermeasures against fraud and the fundamental gaming characteristics (for example, the procedure for generating hit games and open-game games) are almost the same, so there is not much difference in error type for each model. The control processing related to error notification using the production means other than the movable body accessory (production means such as the light generation means, the sound generation device, or the image display device) is compatible between the old model and the new model. high. From such a new model development / design point of view, it is possible to exclusively use effect means such as a light generating means other than the movable body accessory, a sound generating apparatus, and / or an image display apparatus as the error notification means. This is because it is preferable. Also, since humans are known to react to objects that move three-dimensionally rather than two-dimensional things such as light and images, in order to inform players that over-winning has occurred properly, It is preferable to use a “movable body accessory” that performs a three-dimensional operation.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it has the structure provided with the production | presentation means which can be combined with execution of an error alerting | reporting, and execution of an over winning effect, when these are the structures utilized each independently, specifically, In the case of a configuration comprising a plurality of types of production means including one or more types of error dedicated production means that are used only for error notification and one or more types of over-winning special production means that are used only for over-winning productions, Since the over winning special effect means is an effect means that is not used for error notification, regardless of whether there is an error or not (without being disturbed by the error notification when an over winning effect appears during an error) The same over-winning effect can be produced as in normal times.

  In the following, a description will be given of a mode provided with effect means that is used for both error notification execution and over-winning effect execution. Alternatively, the same over-winning effect as in normal times may be displayed.

(About error types)
First, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, error types that may occur in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 exemplarily shows error types deeply related to the present invention among errors that can occur in the gaming machine 1. Moreover, the priority shown in the figure is a priority in which error notification is given priority when a plurality of types of errors occur with respect to the gaming machine 1, and the more serious the error is with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1, The priority is set high. The error notification mode is such that error notification according to each error type is executed and the error type can be notified, an error light effect by the decorative lamp 45 or LED, an error sound effect by the speaker 46, a liquid crystal display device An error image display effect by 36 appears.

(1) Unusual prize winning error for big prize opening As an error having the highest priority, there is an "illegal winning prize winning prize error". This big prize opening illegal prize error is an error that occurs when an abnormal prize (illegal prize) is detected for a big prize opening (lower big prize opening 40, right big prize opening 50).

  For example, when the special winning prize device is not in operation (when the special electric prize operating flag is OFF (≠ 5 AH)) when the game is not in a winning game, the lower big prize opening sensor When the 42a or the right big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball, this is regarded as an illegal prize and detected as an error. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, either the lower major prize opening 40 or the right major prize opening 50 is controlled to be opened / closed according to the type of hit. I'm monitoring what's inside. For example, if the winning at the right major winning opening 50 is detected even though the lower major winning opening 40 is a winning game, this is regarded as an illegal winning, and an error notification is executed. ing.

  In addition, even if it is within the prize winning period, the lower prize winning sensor 42a and the right prize winning sensor 52a are malfunctioned due to fraudulent acts such as radio wave goto, and are continuously turned on. Is assumed. In such a case, an unexpected over-winning may occur due to design.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to monitor such an illegal act, if there is a winning number that cannot be assumed in design due to an over winning in one round (an illegal over winning number), this is regarded as an illegal winning. Error notification is executed. Specifically, in the case of the lower major winning opening 40, the number of over winnings in the round is limited to approximately two in design, so that the number of over winnings in one round is excessively larger (for example, 4 If it is detected above, this is regarded as an illegal prize and error notification is executed. In addition, the right big prize opening 50 is designed so that over-winning is more likely to occur than the lower big prize opening 40, and the number of over-winnings is limited to about three in design, so one round is limited. When five or more over winning prizes are detected, this is regarded as an illegal winning and error notification is executed.

  In addition, as described above, the number of fraudulent over winnings can be determined according to the winning type or the winning game mode, without being limited to the fraud monitoring mode in which the number of fraudulent winnings is determined for each big winning opening. For example, in the case of a specific hit type such as 2R short open latent big hit or 2R short open non-probable big hit, there is no over winning, so when there is an over win in a specific hit type (specific The occurrence of an illegal over-winning is monitored for the win type), and this may be regarded as an illegal winning and error notification may be executed. In addition, as in 12R non-probable big hit games, over-winning does not occur during a round game in which a short opening pattern is executed, so when there is an over winning in a round game related to the short opening pattern (specific The occurrence of an illegal over-winning is monitored for the second round), and this may be regarded as an illegal winning and error notification may be made.

  If the number of over-winnings detected during the game, that is, the cumulative number of over-winnings is detected more than a predetermined number (when satisfying the relationship of “illegal over-winning cumulative number ≦ over-winning cumulative number”), It may be considered that error notification is executed. In this case, the cumulative number of illegal over winnings can be determined according to the winning type or the winning game type. For example, in the case of a specific hit type such as 2R short open latent big hit or 2R short open non-probable big hit, or in a round game related to a short open pattern, no over win is generated, so an illegal over win is won. For example, the cumulative number can be set to “0”. Also, in the case of 12R long opening probability variation big hit or 16R long opening probability variation big hit, over winning is likely to occur. In such a hit type, the design lower big winning opening 40 or right large winning opening 50 is over. In consideration of the limit value of the number of winnings, the cumulative number of illegal over winnings can be set, for example, to a number exceeding “specified round number × limit value”. In this case, the cumulative number of illegal over winnings corresponding to each big winning opening can be determined.

  In the event that the above-mentioned big prize opening illegal prize error occurs, the main control unit 20 that monitors the detection information of the lower big prize opening sensor 42a or the right big prize opening sensor 52a sends an effect control command (big prize opening illegality) corresponding to the error. (Winning command) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts an error notification corresponding to the big prize opening illegal winning error, and the error notification is continuously performed until the power is turned off. For example, when the main power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by a pachinko hall clerk during a winning game, the big prize opening illegal prize error is canceled. In this case, the hit game is started again after the power is restored.

  As a notification mode of the above-mentioned big prize opening illegal prize error, an error light effect (for example, an illegal prize light effect) by a light emitting means such as a decoration lamp 45 or an LED provided at an appropriate position of the gaming machine, and an error by the speaker 46 are used. A sound effect (for example, illegal winning warning sound) and an image display effect for error by the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a warning display such as “Large winning mouth abnormal error. Please call a staff member” on the liquid crystal screen) Is done. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

(2) Magnetic sensor error “Magnetic sensor error” is the next highest priority error. The magnetic sensor error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor. In order to prevent this “magnet goto” action mainly, this error is reported as an error when a magnetic abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor.

  When the magnetic sensor error occurs, an effect control command (magnetic sensor error command) corresponding to the error is transmitted from the main control unit 20 that monitors the magnetic sensor to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, error notification corresponding to the magnetic sensor error is started, and this error notification is continuously performed until the power is turned off. The main power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated by a pachinko hall clerk, and when the power is cut off by the pachinko hall clerk, the magnetic sensor error is canceled (such as a radio wave sensor error and a vibration sensor error described later). The same applies to.

  As a notification mode of the magnetic sensor error, an error light effect (for example, for a magnetic sensor error) by a light emitting means such as a decoration lamp 45 or an LED provided at an appropriate position of the gaming machine, as in the case of an incorrect winning prize error. Light effect), sound effect for error by the speaker 46 (for example, magnetic sensor error sound), and image display effect for error by the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, “magnetic sensor error. Please call a staff” on the liquid crystal screen). Warning display) appears. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

  In addition, various error notification modes of “radio wave sensor error”, “vibration sensor error”, and “lower starting port illegal winning picture error” to be described later are the same as in the case of a large winning port incorrect winning error or a magnetic sensor error notification mode. The error notification using the decorative lamp 45 or LED, the speaker 46, and the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to each error type is executed (see FIG. 35). Therefore, in the following description, the description of the error notification mode will be omitted while being omitted as appropriate in order to avoid redundant description.

(3) Radio wave sensor error “Radio wave sensor error” is the next highest priority error. The radio wave sensor error is an error that occurs when an illegal radio wave is detected by the radio wave sensor. This error is mainly reported as an error when an illegal radio wave is detected by the radio wave sensor in order to prevent the “radio wave” act.

  When the radio wave sensor error occurs, an effect control command (radio wave sensor error command) corresponding to the error is transmitted from the main control unit 20 that monitors the radio wave sensor to the effect control unit 24. On the side of the effect control unit 24, when this command is received, error notification corresponding to the radio wave sensor error is started, and this error notification is continuously performed until the power is turned off. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

(4) Vibration sensor error The next highest priority error is “vibration sensor error”. As described above, the vibration sensor error is an error that occurs when an abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor (a kind of fraud detection sensor 99). This error is mainly reported to prevent an “exciting” action, and when an abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor, this is reported as an error.

  When the vibration sensor error occurs, an effect control command (vibration sensor error command) corresponding to the error is transmitted from the main control unit 20 that monitors the vibration sensor to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, error notification corresponding to the vibration sensor error is started, and this error notification is continuously performed until the power is turned off. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

(5) Unauthorized winning error at lower start opening Next, there is an “unauthorized winning error at lower starting opening” as the next highest priority error. The lower starting port illegal winning error is when the winning of the lower starting port 35 is detected when the open power game is not in the state of no power support (when the normal power operating flag is OFF (≠ 5AH)) This is an error that occurs when the mouth sensor 35a detects a game ball. The above-mentioned normal power operating flag is a flag for determining whether or not a normal power open game is in progress. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a normal power open game is in progress. When the flag is in an OFF state (≠ 5AH), it indicates that the game is not in the open-circuit game. The state of the normal power operation flag is managed in the ordinary electric accessory management process (step S58). It is not monitored for illegal winnings when there is an electric support. This is because the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is drastically increased and the lower start opening 35 is frequently opened when the electric support is in a state (because a general electric open game occurs frequently). This is because there is little need to monitor illegal winnings under such circumstances.

  When the above-mentioned lower starting opening illegal winning error occurs, the main control unit 20 treats the lower starting opening 35 as invalid, treats it as having no winning, and sets the starting opening incorrect information timer to 30000 ms (30 seconds). Set. Further, the main control unit 20 transmits an effect control command corresponding to the error (lower start opening illegal winning error command) to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts an error notification corresponding to the lower starting port illegal winning error, and this error notification is executed until the starting port incorrect information timer elapses. Further, in the present embodiment, since the illegal winning of the lower start opening 35 is treated as invalid, error notification is stopped even if there is an illegal winning.

(6) Winning switch error The next highest priority error is “winning switch error”. The winning switch error is an error that occurs when the general winning opening sensor 43a detects the ON state for a certain period of time. As the winning switch error, for example, the general winning opening 43 may become clogged and the general winning opening sensor 43a may continue to output a detection signal of a game ball, which is reported as an error. Since the winning switch error is often caused by clogging in the general winning opening 43, basically, the cause is eliminated by the pachinko hall clerk.

  When the winning switch error occurs, the main control unit 20 transmits an effect control command (winning switch error command) corresponding to the error to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the winning switch error. When the cause of the error is removed, an error release command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, and when the release control command is received, the effect control unit 24 ends the error notification after 30 seconds.

  As a notification mode of the winning switch error, an error light effect (for example, a winning switch error light effect) by a light emitting means such as an LED provided in a proper position of the decorative lamp 45 or the gaming machine, and an error by the liquid crystal display device 36 are used. An image display effect (for example, a warning display such as “a prize switch error.

(7) Insufficient payout error The next highest priority error is an “insufficient payout error”. The payout shortage error is an error that occurs when there is an abnormality (insufficient payout) in the payout of the number of prize balls from the game ball payout device 19. This payout shortage error is detected by the ball counting sensor 73.

  When the payout shortage error occurs, the main control unit 20 transmits an effect control command (payout shortage error command) corresponding to the error to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the payout shortage error. This payout shortage error is canceled by a pachinko hall clerk by pressing an error release switch (not shown) provided in the game ball payout device 19. When the cause of the error is removed, an error cancel command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, and when the cancel control command is received, the effect control unit 24 ends the error notification.

  As a notification mode of an insufficient payout error, an error light effect (for example, an insufficient payout error light effect) by a light emitting means such as an LED provided in a proper position of the decorative lamp 45 or the gaming machine, and an error by the liquid crystal display device 36 are used. An image display effect (for example, a warning display such as “Game ball cannot be paid out. Please call a staff member”) appears on the LCD screen, and the error sound is not executed.

(8) Sphere Counting Error “Sphere Counting Error” is the next highest priority error. The ball count error is an error that occurs when there is an abnormality in the payout of the number of prize balls from the game ball payout device 19 (when a payout greater than the number of prize balls to be paid out is detected). This ball count error is detected by the ball count sensor 73.

  When the ball count error occurs, the main control unit 20 transmits an effect control command (ball count error command) corresponding to the error to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the ball count error. This ball counting error is canceled by a pachinko hall clerk pressing an error cancel switch provided in the game ball paying device 19 in the same manner as the above-mentioned payout shortage error. When the cause of the error is removed, an error cancel command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, and when the cancel control command is received, the effect control unit 24 ends the error notification. The notification mode of the ball count error is the same as the notification mode of the payout shortage error described above.

(9) Gaming Ball Replenishment Error As a next highest priority error, there is a “gaming ball replenishment error”. Although not shown, on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a 'game ball storage tank for storing game balls supplied from a game ball supply device (not shown) of the pachinko hall side island facility 'Is formed. A game ball payout device 19 is provided in connection with a tank rail for guiding game balls from the game ball storage tank. The game ball supply error is a shortage of game balls to be supplied to the game ball storage tank from the above game ball supply device due to clogging or the like, resulting in a shortage of game balls in the game ball storage tank. This error occurs when If there is a shortage of game balls in the game ball storage tank, no prize balls can be paid out from the game ball payout device 19, and this is reported as an error. The game ball supply shortage error is detected by the supply shortage detection sensor 72.

  When the above game ball supply error occurs, an effect control command (game ball supply error error command) corresponding to the error is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts an error notification corresponding to the game ball supply error. This game ball replenishment error is solved by removing causes such as clogging of the game ball replenishment device by a pachinko hall clerk. When the cause of the error is removed, an error cancel command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, and when the cancel control command is received, the effect control unit 24 ends the error notification.

  As a notification mode of a game ball replenishment error, an error light effect (for example, a game ball replenishment error light effect) by a light emitting means such as a decoration lamp 45 or an LED provided at an appropriate position of the game machine, and a liquid crystal display device An error image display effect by 36 (for example, a warning display such as “There are insufficient game balls. Please call a staff member”) appears on the liquid crystal screen, and the error sound is not executed.

(10) Ball clogging error (full error)
The next highest priority error is a “ball clogging error (full error)”. The ball clogging error is an error that occurs when the upper tray 9 that stores the game balls becomes full. This clogging error is detected by the full detection sensor 60. When the upper tray 9 is filled with game balls to some extent, it becomes impossible to pay out prize balls from the game ball dispensing device 19, so when the storage amount of the game balls in the upper tray 9 is determined to be full by the full detection sensor 60, This is reported as an error. When the ball clogging error continues for a predetermined time, the firing control board 28 stops the firing operation by the launching device 32.

  When the ball clogging error occurs, an effect control command (ball clogging error command) corresponding to the error is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the clogging error.

  Note that this ball clogging error is eliminated only by eliminating the full tank state of the upper tray 9 that is the cause. Specifically, when the player himself operates the ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper tray 9 to the lower side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball stored in the upper tray 9 is moved downward. Since it moves to the dollar box, the full tank state can be eliminated. That is, the ball clogging error is an error that can be canceled by the player himself, unlike the errors (1) to (9).

  When the cause of the error is removed, an error cancel command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, and when the cancel control command is received, the effect control unit 24 ends the error notification.

  As a notification mode of the ball clogging error, an error image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a warning display such as “Please remove the ball” on the liquid crystal screen) appears, and an error sound effect by the speaker 46 (For example, a ball clogging error sound (for example, “please remove the ball” voice) appears. This error notification is an error notification prompting the player to cancel the error by operating the player himself. In this embodiment, Although the present invention is not limited to this, the game ball is stored by the upper receiving tray 9. As is conventionally known, the upper receiving tray 9 and another receiving tray (so-called "" "Lower saucer": a pachinko gaming machine that is provided with a discharge mechanism for discharging game balls to the lower saucer when the upper saucer 9 is full, and configured to store game balls in the lower saucer) This Whether or not the lower tray is full may be detected by the full detection sensor 60. In this case, the player can operate the lower tray, and the game balls stored in the lower tray are moved downward. It is possible to form a ball pulling mechanism for pulling out and to move the game balls stored in the lower tray by operation to the lower dollar box.

(6-3-1. Over-winning effects according to error type)
Among the errors described above, an error having a higher priority is a serious (serious) error for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the errors (1) to (5) above are mainly errors that are intended for fraudulent acts that the pachinko gaming machine 1 should be wary of, and in order to cancel such errors when they occur. The lock state of the frame 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 must be released, and the main power source of the power control board (not shown) disposed inside the gaming machine 1 main body must be shut off. However, the player cannot do it, and it is done by a pachinko hall clerk. Therefore, when these errors occur, there is a high possibility that fraudulent acts have occurred, and the pachinko hall side may need to investigate the body of the illegal equipment against the player and investigate the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a long time. Conceivable. Such an error type is likely to cause a situation in which a game that is in progress must be interrupted for a long time. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game cannot be continued due to an error, or it is difficult to continue the game. It is classified as an error type (hereinafter abbreviated as “game continuation failure error”). Here, the error classification of the above-mentioned game continuation failure error is classified as an error type (first type error) belonging to “first type”.

  Next, the errors (6) to (9) are errors having a lower severity than the above (1) to (5). For example, the winning switch error of (6) is a switching error for the general winning opening 43, and the cause thereof is also due to clogging, etc. The error can be canceled without shutting down. When the above winning switch error occurs, the pachinko hall clerk opens the glass door 6 and directly touches the general winning opening 43. However, the error related to the illegal winning as in the above (1) to (5) On the other hand, if the game is a hit game, the player can ask the pachinko hall clerk to cancel the error after the hit game without hindering the progress of the hit game. In this embodiment, the game can be continued. Error type.

  In addition, the payout shortage error in (7), the ball count error in (8), and the game ball replenishment out error in (9) are similar to the winning switch error in (6) above. Since the player only has to ask the pachinko hall clerk to cancel the error after playing the game without hindering the progress, in this embodiment, the error type is such that the game can be continued. However, the error types (7) to (9) are errors related to the game ball payout device 19, and the prize ball payout operation is stopped until the error is canceled. Although it is not possible to digest the hit game without any trouble as in normal times, these errors are classified into low-severity errors, and in this embodiment, the firing operation is not particularly stopped, and the hit game is also during the error. Can be continued. If a winning ball is detected even during an error, a payout control command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, and for a winning ball that has not been paid out, a payout control command is used. The payout control board (payout control unit) 29 side can grasp this. When the error is canceled, the payout control board 29 pays out the number of prize balls, so that no disadvantage is caused to the player.

  As described above, the errors (6) to (9) cannot be canceled by the player himself, but are classified as error types (second type errors) belonging to the “second type” as error categories that can be continued. It is classified as.

  Next, as a less serious error than the above (6) to (9), there is a ball clogging error (full error) of the above (10). As described above, this error is an error that can be easily canceled by the player himself, and the error notification is also an error that prompts the error to be canceled by the player himself. Therefore, even if a ball clogging error occurs, it is very easy to cancel the error. There is no particular problem in the progress of the game, and the game is more successful than the errors (6) to (9). You can continue.

  As described above, the error (10) can be canceled by the player himself. As an error category in which the game can be continued even if an error occurs, this error type belongs to the “third type”. It is classified as (type 3 error). This third type error is different from the second type error in that the error can be canceled by the player himself.

  In this way, various errors can be classified into types according to the seriousness of the gaming machine. Therefore, in the present embodiment, focusing on this point, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute an over-winning effect (which can include a probability change notification effect) according to the type of error that is occurring. . Specifically, if an error classification “Type 1 error” that prevents the game from being continued occurs, there is a high possibility that the gaming machine was fraudulent. Since it is a top priority to notify that there was fraudulent activity, it is only necessary to notify the error, and not to perform (limit) the over winning effect itself. (Error notification priority control: see the “over-winning” column of the first type error in FIG. 35).

  On the other hand, when the “second type error” and “third type error” of the error classification that the game can be continued occurs, since the error is relatively low in severity for the gaming machine, When an over winning occurs, it is preferable to notify the player of this without limiting the over winning effect. Therefore, when the “second type error” and the “third type error” occur, the effect means (first effect means: for example, the decoration lamp 45, the speaker 46, the liquid crystal display device 36) other than the movable body accessory. An error notification is executed, and an over-winning effect is executed by a movable body accessory (second effect means: for example, a flower-shaped accessory 98) (in the present embodiment, the same operation mode as the normal over-winning effect) Operate in an operating manner). As a result, when an over-winning occurs even though an error is occurring, an over-winning effect is executed, and this can be notified (the second type error and the third type error in FIG. 35). (Refer to the “Over winning” column).

  As for the error type, the production control unit 24 grasps what kind of error has occurred by the error command (various error commands corresponding to the error type) transmitted from the main control unit 20 side, and the above-mentioned OV winning large When a winning mouth winning command is received, the movement of the movable object related to over winning is controlled according to the current error type.

  In the case of the above-mentioned first type error, in the case of a specific error type having a relatively high priority, specifically, an error type (for example, (1) to (4) described above) for a special winning opening. In the case of an error type related to the big prize mouth such as a big prize mouth illegal prize error, magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, vibration sensor error, etc. During the error, it may be configured not to transmit the grand prize winning command at the time of the big winning prize winning (the regular big winning prize winning command and the OV winning big prize winning command) itself. In this case, it is determined by the control on the main control unit 20 side whether or not the over winning effect is prohibited (restricted) according to the error type, and in the case of the first type error, it is possible to stop only the error notification.

(Modification 1)
In the above, in the case of the first type error, only the error notification is described and the over winning effect is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of an error type for a big prize opening, considering that there is a high possibility of over-winning due to fraudulent acts, in the case of error notification, a light generation means, a sound generation device, and an effect In addition to the display device, it is possible to notify an error by a movable object and effectively notify the outside that an illegal act has occurred.

  In detail, when an error is detected (here, an error related to the big winning opening of (1) to (4) above), until an over winning occurs, a light generating means, a sound generating device, When error notification by the liquid crystal display device is executed and an over winning is generated, the movable body accessory is operated in a predetermined operation mode.

  The “predetermined operation mode” here may be a normal operation mode, but may be a different “error operation mode” dedicated to an error. That is, a specific movable body accessory can be provided with an over-winning notification function and an error notification function. For example, when the flower-shaped accessory 98 reports an over-winning in error, the error operation mode is different from the normal operation mode (operation mode corresponding to the movable body effects B-1 to B-3). Can be executed. Specifically, when an over-winning occurs during an error, the amount of momentum of the whole flower-shaped accessory 98, only the petal portion, or the flower heart and the petal portion is larger than the normal operation mode. Or the operation can be repeated multiple times in succession. Thereby, it can be understood that the movable body accessory exhibits an operation mode different from that in the normal state. As a result, it is possible to more effectively notify the pachinko hall clerk, other players, and the like that a gotting action has occurred to the outside.

(Modification 2)
Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the structure which performs an over winning effect in the case of the said 2nd type error and a 3rd type error, this invention is not limited to this. For example, only in the case of the “third type error” in which the player can cancel the error, the movable object is operated at the time of over winning, like “first type error” and “second type error”, In the case of an error that cannot be canceled by the player himself (because it is necessary to call a pachinko hall clerk to cancel the error), even if the over-winning effect itself is prohibited (limited) good.

  Although not shown in FIG. 35, there is an error that requires a replacement due to a malfunction in a gaming component as a gaming continuation failure error. For example, there is a “disconnection detection error”. The disconnection detection error is an error detected when a wiring (harness) connecting the control boards to each other and the control board and various sensors is disconnected. For example, when the wiring of the top winning opening sensor 34a is disconnected, the winning detection signal cannot be transmitted, and this is notified of an error.

  When the disconnection detection error occurs, an effect control command (disconnection detection error command) corresponding to the error is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the disconnection detection error. As a notification mode of the disconnection error, an error light effect (for example, a disconnection detection error light effect) by a light emitting means such as an LED provided at an appropriate position of the decorative lamp 45 or the gaming machine, and an error by the liquid crystal display device 36 are used. An image display effect (for example, a warning display such as “I am disconnected. Please call my staff”) appears on the LCD screen, and the error sound is not executed. In addition, when the cause of the error is removed, such as exchanging gaming parts (in the case of a disconnection detection error, replacing the corresponding harness), an error release command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, and the effect control unit 24 is notified. On the side, when this cancel command is received, the error notification is terminated.

  In addition to the above “disconnection error”, the game continuation failure error includes a fuse (for example, a fuse of 15A, 12A, 5A, etc.) that is mounted on the power supply control board and protects the electric circuit from a large current exceeding the rating. Detects abnormalities such as a “fuse blow error” that occurs when a fuse exceeding the rating flows and a fuse blows, and the position detection sensors 97b and 98b that detect the origin position of the movable object cannot detect the origin position Control board error (main control board error, production that occurs when an abnormality is detected in the CPU operation of the control board (main control board, production control board, payout control board, etc.) Control board error, payout control board error, etc.). Such an error is an error in which a gaming part has a defect and needs to be replaced, and it is often impossible or difficult to continue gaming. Therefore, such an error can be defined as the “first type error”. Note that the notification mode and control of the “actual object operation error”, “fuse blow error”, and “control board error” are substantially the same processing contents as in the case of the disconnection error, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Various effects (including error notification) by the pachinko gaming machine 1 are displayed by the effecting means provided in the gaming machine. Such directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means that can exert a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, and tactile sensations. Sound generating device, production display device such as liquid crystal display device 36, vibration device for transmitting vibration to the operator's body, wind pressure device for applying wind pressure to the player's body, or the visual effect of the operation is exhibited. A movable object is a typical example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eye like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes an image-independent display device (for example, a 7-segment display). The term “image display device” refers mainly to a type that produces an effect by displaying an image, and a device that produces an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 7 to 23>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 23, the game operation process on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The main control unit 20 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 7) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 8).

<6. Main process on the main control side: FIG. 7>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main process starts when the power is turned on without operating the initialization switch (not shown), such as when recovering from a power failure, and when the initialization switch is turned on. May turn on. In any case, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, a voltage is supplied to each control board by a power control board (not shown), and the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) performs main processing on the main control side shown in FIG. Start.

  In the main control side main process, the CPU 201 first executes a necessary initial setting process before the start of the gaming operation (step S011). For example, it first sets itself to an interrupt disabled state, sets it to a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), and initializes register values in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer.

  Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal which is an output signal of the RAM clear switch inputted through an input port (not shown) is determined (step 012). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch operated by the store clerk of the pachinko parlor. doing.

  Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the determination result in step S012 is “YES”, and the entire area of the RAM is cleared to zero (step S016). Therefore, the value of the backup flag set at the time of power-off becomes zero together with other checksum values.

  Next, a “RAM clear display command” for notifying that the RAM area has been cleared to zero is transmitted as an initialization command to each control board (step S017). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for notifying that the RAM has been cleared (step S018). When the RAM clear is executed, the gaming state is initialized, the internal gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)) is 00H which designates the normal state. Also, when the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear display command, an initialization notification effect for notifying that the RAM has been cleared is executed until the RAM clear notification timer (30 seconds) elapses. As the state effect mode, the effect mode is set to the normal effect mode under the normal state.

  Next, the CTC that outputs an interrupt signal for starting the timer interrupt operation is initialized (step S019), and the CPU is set in an interrupt enabled state.

  Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number update processes are executed during that time (steps S020 to S022). In this various random number update processing (step S021), various random numbers used in special symbol variation display games and normal symbol variation display games (random numbers related to jackpot lotteries circulating through a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (used for symbol lottery) Random numbers used for changing the initial value (start value) of the random numbers for special symbol determination) and random numbers related to lottery per auxiliary (random numbers for determining per-subject winning lottery per auxiliary) The initial value random number for determination and the initial value random number for determination per auxiliary) and the random number for variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern are updated.

  In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, a special symbol determination random number counter initial value generation counter, a special symbol determination counter, and the like as various random number counters used for symbol lottery related to jackpot lottery, supplementary lottery, or variation pattern lottery, etc. There are provided a random number counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary sub-counting counter, a random counter for determining an auxiliary per auxiliary counter, a random counter for variation pattern, and the like. These counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. In the various random number update processing in step S021, the above-described special symbol determination random number counter, the two initial value generation counters for generating the initial value of the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, the fluctuation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated. Generate various soft random numbers. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as the variation pattern random number counter is 0 to 238, a value is obtained from the count value storage area for generating the variation pattern random number value in the RAM 203, and 1 is added to the obtained value. And then stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 239, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes except during a timer interrupt process that is executed intermittently.

  Returning to the determination process in step S012, the description will be continued. At the time of recovery from the power failure state, the initialization switch (RAM clear signal) is in the OFF state (step S012: YES). In such a case, the backup flag value is determined following the determination process in step S012 (step S013). Note that the backup flag is set to the ON state (backup flag = 5AH ('** H' means any hexadecimal number) when the power is cut off), and the backup flag is set to the OFF state (backup The flag is reset to 00H).

  Therefore, when the power is turned on or when recovering from a power failure, the backup flag should normally be in the ON state. However, the backup flag is reset (OFF) if the predetermined processing is not completed before the power is cut off for some reason. Therefore, when the backup flag is in the OFF state (step S013: NO), the process proceeds to step S016 to return the operation of the gaming machine to the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the backup flag is in an ON state (step S013: YES), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. When the checksum value is calculated, the calculation result is compared with the stored value at the SUM address in the RAM 203 (step S014). The SUM address stores a checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation when the power is turned off. The stored calculation result is maintained by a backup power source together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match according to the determination in step S014.

  However, if the checksum operation could not be executed when the power was turned off, or even if it can be executed, the data in the work area may be damaged before the checksum operation of the main process is executed. In such a case, the determination result in step S014 is inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to a discrepancy between the determination results (step S014: NO), the process proceeds to step S016, RAM clear processing is executed, and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. On the other hand, when the checksum value obtained by the checksum calculation matches the stored value at the SUM address (step S014: YES), the stack pointer before power shutdown is restored based on the backup data, and the processing at power shutdown is performed. A game restoration process necessary for starting the game from the state is performed (step S015). Also, in the game restoration process, predetermined information for game restoration is obtained from the backup information (the number of special figure 1 and special figure 2 operation hold balls, the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and the internal game at the time of power-off. State information, etc.) and various effect control commands (power return command) including the information are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. As a result, the effect control unit 24 is informed of the game progress state when the power is cut off, and is restored to the effect state when the power is cut off when the game is restored.

  When the game restoration process at step S015 is completed, the process proceeds to the process at step S019, the CTC is initialized and the CPU is set in the interrupt enabled state. In the meantime, various random number update processes described above are executed (steps S020 to S022).

<7. Main control timer interrupt processing: Fig. 8>
Next, a timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interruption process. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 4 ms) from the CTC, and interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the address value (including data described in the address) when the CPU 201 reads / writes the main memory such as RAM and ROM, the result information obtained by the arithmetic processing on the program, etc. A process such as reading into and taking in a CPU built-in register is sometimes referred to as “acquisition”, and when the CPU 201 accesses a work area of the RAM and stores predetermined data is sometimes referred to as “storage”.

  In FIG. 8, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring the power supply state from the power supply control board (step S051). In this power abnormality check process, it is mainly monitored whether the power is normally supplied. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power interruption occurs, a backup process is performed in which predetermined game information at the time of power interruption is stored in the RAM so that the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is performed (step S052). Timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timer described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

  Next, input management processing is performed (step S053). In this input management process, information detected by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the winning counter. Here, the detection information by various sensors includes, for example, an upper start opening sensor 34a, a lower start opening sensor 35a, a normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a lower large winning opening sensor 42a, a right large winning opening sensor 52a, and a general winning opening sensor. This is ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of a switch signal output from a winning detection switch such as 43a. Thereby, it is monitored for each interruption whether or not a game ball is detected (winning occurs) at each winning opening. The “winning counter” is a counter for counting the number of winning game balls (winning number) provided for each winning slot. In the present embodiment, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, an upper start opening winning counter for the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening winning counter for the lower starting opening 35, a normal symbol starting opening winning counter for the normal pattern starting opening 37, A lower prize winning counter for the big prize winning opening 40, a right big winning prize winning counter for the right big winning opening 50, a general winning prize winning counter for the general winning opening 43, and the like are provided. The input management process and the winning counter in step S053 function as a number-of-balls counting unit.

  This input management process also functions as an abnormality determination means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, and is based on whether or not the detection information from the winning detection switch has won a prize during a period in which a prize should be allowed. Whether or not there is an illegal winning. For example, even though the movable wing piece 47 is not in operation, the lower start port sensor 35a detects a game ball or does not play a big hit game (within the big winning port effective winning period), but the big winning port sensor 42a. Alternatively, if 52a detects a game ball, this is regarded as an illegal prize, and a predetermined error process is executed in an error management process (step S055) described later in order to notify the outside of the fact. It has become. Examples of the error related to the illegal prize include the big prize mouth illegal prize error and the lower big prize prize illegal prize error shown in FIG. When an illegal winning is detected, the detection information can be invalidated, and the payout of prize balls can be treated as invalid. Thereby, it is possible to effectively prevent a winning ball due to illegal winning.

  Next, random number management processing within a timer interrupt for periodically updating the random numbers related to each variable display game is performed (step S054). In this periodic random number update process, a special symbol determination random number or auxiliary per-subject determination random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and a process for changing the start value of the random number counter is performed each time the random number counter makes a round. For example, the value of the special symbol judgment random number counter is updated (added by +1) within a predetermined range, and the special symbol judgment random number counter initial value generation counter value is read each time the special symbol judgment random number counter makes one round. The value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter is random while the update cycle is constant.

  Next, an error management process for monitoring presence / absence of abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S055). This error management process also functions as an abnormality determination means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, and monitors for abnormalities in the gaming operation state. Do. Since errors have many error types as shown in FIG. 35, error processing corresponding to the error types is performed here. As error processing, for example, a predetermined game operation (for example, game ball payout operation or game ball launch operation) is stopped, or an error command corresponding to the error type is produced in order to execute an error notification operation. Or transmitted to the control unit 24.

  In the error management process, in addition to the error notification process related to the illegal winning for the lower start opening 35 and the large winning openings 40 and 50, detection from the fraud detection sensor 99 (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, or vibration sensor). To detect fraud based on information and to handle error (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, vibration sensor error) error processing (if the error cancellation condition is satisfied, to cancel the currently occurring error Error cancellation processing (including the above error cancellation command transmission) is executed.

  Next, prize ball management processing is performed (step S056). In this winning ball management process, the data stored in the above input management process is grasped, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of winning balls is issued as a payout control board (payout). Control unit) 29. Upon receiving this payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning mouth (a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning mouth × the number of winning balls corresponding to the value of the winning counter) is paid out. Yes. If a winning ball is detected even during an error, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 29.

  Next, normal symbol management processing is performed (step S057). In this normal symbol management process, a lottery per auxiliary in the normal symbol fluctuation display game is performed, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the stop display mode of the normal symbol are determined, or blinking is repeated every predetermined time. Create normal symbol data (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol variation), and if normal symbol is not varying, create data for stop display (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol stop display) Or The normal symbol management process functions as an auxiliary game lottery unit and a normal symbol display unit (normal symbol display control unit) for controlling the normal symbol variation display operation.

  Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is performed (step S058). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the generation of an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a necessary for the generation of the ordinary electric game based on the lottery result of the auxiliary per lot in the normal symbol management process (step S057). And the data (solenoid control data) is set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a in a solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable blade piece 47 is controlled. Note that the ordinary electric accessory management process functions as an auxiliary hit control means.

  Next, special symbol management processing is performed (step S059). In this special symbol management process (hit determination means), the big symbol lottery in the special symbol variation display game is mainly performed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (prefetch variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) based on the lottery result And special stop symbols. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, special electric accessory management processing is performed (step S060). In this special electric utility management process, when the big hit lottery result is “big hit” or “small win”, the setting process necessary for executing and controlling the hit game corresponding to the big hit is performed. Details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, right notification information management processing is performed (step S061). In this right-handed notification information management process, when the high base gaming state of “electric support is present” occurs or when the winning game is in progress, the condition device operation flag described later, When either the winning flag or the special symbol short-time state flag is “5AH”, it is determined that the right-handed state is being entered, and right-handed instruction information (information for instructing to aim at the right-down flow path 3c (large winning opening 50 And a process for making a “right-handed notification effect (launching position induction effect)” appearing to inform the normal symbol start opening 37 of winning instruction information)). As the right-handed notification effect, for example, an image prompting the player to “right-handed” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in a state where there is an electric support or when a hit game is started (for example, “right-handed”). An image display effect accompanied by character display), and a sound effect that prompts the user to make a right stroke from the speaker 46 (for example, a voice of “Right strike right”). In the case of the right-handed state, a “right-handed instruction command” for instructing the start of the launch position guidance effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Upon receiving this command, the effect control unit 24 receives the launch position. It is the structure which controls a guidance effect.

  Further, in the right-handed notification information management process, when the low base gaming state of “no electric support” occurs or when the winning game is not in progress, specifically, a condition device operation flag described later, When the middle flag and the special symbol short-time state flag are other than “5AH” (00H), it is determined that the left-handed state is being performed, and the right-handed notification effect is not displayed, or the right-handed notification effect currently being executed is executed. Perform processing to cancel. In the case of the left-handed state, a “left-handed instruction command” for instructing to cancel the firing position guidance effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives the command and the effect control unit 24 It is the structure which controls a guidance effect. Thereby, an appropriate launch position is instructed to the player.

  On the side of the production control unit 24, when it is estimated that the player has accidentally aimed at the launch position on the left flow path 3b side when the player is in the right-handed state, When a winning occurs at the upper starting opening 34, or when no winning occurs at the normal symbol starting opening 37 even after a predetermined time has elapsed, an appropriate launch position is set for the player by the effect processing on the effect control unit 24 side. In order to give an instruction (instruct the firing position to the right flow path 3c side), the right-handed launch position warning effect (for example, a warning sound by voice) is controlled to appear. Further, when it is estimated that the player has accidentally aimed at the launch position toward the right flow down path 3c in the left-handed state, for example, the normal symbol starting port 37 in the state without the electric support. When a prize is entered, a left-handed launch position warning effect (for example, a warning sound by voice) is controlled so that the player is instructed of an appropriate launch position (the launch position is indicated on the left flow path 3b side). It is the composition to do. The launch position warning effect in the process on the effect control unit 24 side is different from the launch position guidance effect. As described above, the target of the launch position warning effect is for a case where the player is determined to have the wrong launch position, and is mainly an effect having a warning meaning.

  Next, LED management processing is performed (step S062). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39 and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thereby, the change display and stop display of a normal symbol and a special symbol are performed. It should be noted that the normal symbol display data created in the normal symbol management process in step S057 and the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 9 described later) during the special symbol management process in step S059 Display data is output by this LED management process.

  Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S063). In this external terminal management process, the operation state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external concentrated terminal board 21. The above-mentioned operation state information includes the fact that a big hit game has occurred (condition device has been activated), that a small hit game has occurred, that a symbol variation display game has been executed, and winning information (in the starting and big winning openings) Various information such as winning information and information on the number of winning balls) and specific error occurrence information (for example, illegal winning prize error, magnetism / vibration / radio wave error, etc. for Goto action) are included. By transmitting specific error occurrence information related to the goto action to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to effectively notify the pachinko hall monitoring system and the pachinko hall clerk that the goto action has occurred.

  Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S064). In this solenoid management process, an excitation signal output process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S058, and a special electric accessory management process in step S060. Excitation signal output processing for the special winning opening solenoid 52c based on the solenoid control data is performed. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47 and the open doors 42b and 52b operate in a predetermined pattern, and the lower start opening 35, the lower large prize opening 40, and the right large prize opening 50 are opened and closed.

  After the processing of steps S051 to S064 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (register restoration processing), and the interrupt enabled state is set (step S065). Thus, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interruption, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interruption occurs.

(8. Special symbol management processing: Fig. 9)
Next, the special symbol management process (step S059) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process in step S059.

  In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process on the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then a special symbol on the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). 2. A starting port check process is performed (step S302). Details of the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the start opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hitting flag is determined (step S303). This “small hitting flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a small hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not being played.

  When the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), the state of the condition device operation flag is then determined (step S304). The “conditional device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit game is not being played.

  If the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, neither the small hit game nor the big hit game (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), special In accordance with the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), processing related to the special symbol variation display operation is performed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, when the small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5 AH) or the big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5 AH), the processing relating to the special symbol variable display operation in steps S306 to S308 is not performed. It progresses to the special symbol display data update process of step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game, the special symbol variation display operation is not performed (the special symbol display state of the special symbol display device is displayed after the small hit or after the big hit) As it is). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is “waiting (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)” or “confirming (03H)”. The processing corresponding to each is executed.

  Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H, 01H)”, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the symbol variation processing (step S307) is “confirming (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) is executed. Here, “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned “under confirmation” indicates that the special symbol has been changed and is stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, a change display operation that sets a change start and stop of the special symbol as one set is realized. Details of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306: FIG. 12), the special symbol variation processing (step S307: FIG. 14), and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308: FIGS. 15A to 15B) are as follows. It will be described later.

  When any of the processes in steps S306 to S308 is completed, a special symbol display data update process in step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. If the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blink display during special symbol stop display) is generated. The special symbol display data created here is output in the LED management process (step S62) of FIG. Thus, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S060 of FIG.

(8-1. Special Figure 1 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 10)
First, the special figure 1 starting port check process (step S301 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 starting port check process in step S301. This special figure 1 start opening check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Here, as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1, A process of adding the number of suspended balls on the special figure 1 side due to the winning of the upper start opening 34, a process of storing various random numbers, a process of creating a pending addition command, and the like are performed. The special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 10), which will be described later, also serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, like the special figure 1 starting port check process. As the pre-start process for executing the symbol variation display game 2 (special figure 2 side winning process), the special pending figure 2 side operation pending ball number addition process caused by the occurrence of winning at the lower start opening 35, various random numbers The storage processing and the creation processing of the pending addition command are performed, and the processing contents are substantially the same as the special figure 1 starting port check processing described below.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of the operation holding balls (hereinafter referred to as “special drawing 1 operation holding balls”) according to the special symbol 1 is less than the maximum holding memory number (here, the upper limit of four). If no winning is detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited without doing anything.

  If the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected, but the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to step S320 described later, and the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is not four or more. If this is the case, that is, if it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of special FIG.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used for the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired from the random number counter, and the acquired random number value is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. The reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation holding ball (holding data). In the reserved storage area, the various random numbers as the reserved data are stored in a special symbol. Until the first variation display operation is performed (until the execution of the special symbol variation display game 1), it is held and stored in the order in which the start conditions are established (the winning order). The reserved memory area includes a reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (a special symbol 1 reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first reserved memory area)) and a special symbol 2 And a special figure 2 reserved storage area (second reserved storage area) corresponding to. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of activated balls to be held: n = 4 in the present embodiment). (Holding storage order is stored in the order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area,..., Holding n−1 storage area, holding n storage area).

  Of the various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number and the variation pattern random number are extracted from a random number counter that generates a random number in software corresponding to each random number. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the main process executed between the interrupt process and the interrupt process that occur intermittently in the count value storage areas corresponding to each provided in the RAM 203, The value is obtained as it is.

  On the other hand, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit (a jackpot determination random number counter) that generates a random number in hardware. This random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing when a game ball detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 34a, and the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. The CPU 201 stores this count value as a jackpot determination random number value in a storage area for the jackpot determination random value in the RAM 203 provided separately from the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (a special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer). Then, at the necessary timing, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the random number latch buffer for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is read and used.

  Next, pre-read prohibition data (EVENT: “01H” for prohibiting the pre-read determination as winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating a pending addition command (details will be described later) ”) Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether the“ special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition ”is satisfied (step S316). The “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed (the hold addition command is prohibited by the process of step S315). As a result, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (see the processing route of step S316: YES). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited when the game state is accompanied by the “electric support state”, that is, when the internal game state is in the probabilistic state. As described above, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side when the game state is accompanied by the electric support state is as follows.

  The first reason is that, when placed under the “electric support state”, the winning rate for the lower start opening 35 can be significantly improved over the normal gaming state “high base gaming state (movable wing piece 47 of Activating rate improvement state: The winning probability per assistance is 255/256, and the opening extension function is activated) ”, so that when the player aims the launch position to win the normal symbol start opening 37 ( Estimated that the number of working reserve balls related to the special symbol 2 (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2 working reserve balls”) frequently occurs when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c). Is done. On the other hand, when placed in a state without electric support, the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is low “low base gaming state (the winning probability per assist is 1/256, and the open extension function is not activated. In this embodiment, the game ball is hardly guided or guided to the upper start opening 34 side due to a falling direction changing member such as a game nail. When aiming at the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side, the game is such that it is particularly disadvantageous. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not set the launch position so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b side during the electric support state, and the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball This is because if the pre-reading determination is performed one by one for the special FIG. 1 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate, there is a problem that the control burden increases.

  The second reason is a problem of technical intervention. An example of a problem with technical intervention is that if there is currently only some pre-reading notice effect (especially, a pre-reading notice effect with a high expectation of winning win) for the special figure 1 action holding ball, Is recognized, the special symbol variation display game 2 which is the priority variation side is continuously executed without interrupting the special symbol 2 operation holding ball, and the special symbol 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side) It will be possible to continue the game while receiving the maximum benefits of the jackpot lottery. In this embodiment, “12R length opening probability variation big hit” and “16R length opening probability variation big hit”, which have higher profits, are more likely to be gained by receiving the symbol drawing on the special symbol 2 side than receiving the symbol lottery on the special symbol 1 side. (The details will be described later). For this reason, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the big win lottery on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 2 side) than to receive the big hit lottery on the special symbol 1 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 1 side). It is said to be expanded. Using this, if it is clear that the special figure 1 operation holding ball has won the big hit, after receiving the maximum benefit of the special symbol 2 side big hit lottery until the end of the power support state, The problem of technical intervention, such as digesting the special figure 1 operation holding ball and easily obtaining a big hit, causes inequalities among players.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in view of the above-described problems, the section (prefetch prohibition state) in which the prefetch determination on the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side is prohibited can be switched according to the gaming state. Yes. Specifically, the main control unit 20 prohibits the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination means (for example, prefetch determination processing on the side of FIG. 1; corresponding to S317 to S323 in FIG. “First look-ahead prohibition state (for example, in a state where there is an electric support)” which permits a pre-read determination by a determination means (for example, a pre-read determination process on the special figure 2 side: corresponding to S337 to S343 in FIG. 11 described later) And “a second prefetch prohibition state (for example, in a state without electric support)” that prohibits the prefetch determination by the second prefetch determination unit and allows the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination unit. A function unit is provided as 'prefetch prohibition state control means' that performs switching control based on a predetermined condition (for example, whether or not there is a current internal game state or an electric support state).

  Returning to the description of step S316 again, if the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the processing related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S324) is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S320. .

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), the process proceeds to step S317, and random number determination processing is performed (step S317). This random number determination process is performed as part of the 'prefetching determination' process. Here, the "winning lottery" relating to the current operation holding ball (here, the special figure 1 side) is performed. Perform pre-reading determination (pre-reading determination) in advance.

  When entering the random number determination process in step S317, first, the big hit determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired, and then the per random number determination table for special figure 1 is acquired. . Then, based on the acquired jackpot determination random number value and the hit random number determination table, the winning lottery for the current operation holding ball (another determination of big hit, small hit and lose), that is, the current operation holding ball is The lottery result (the winning lottery result at the start of the fluctuation) of “special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process (see S409 in FIG. 12 described later)” executed when the variable display operation is performed is pre-readed.

(T-1. Per random number determination table)
The hit random number determination table includes a “random figure determination table for special figure 1 (not shown)” relating to the special symbol fluctuation display game 1 and a “random figure determination table for special figure 2” relating to the special symbol fluctuation display game 2. (Not shown) ".

  In these winning random number determination tables, the winning type (whether big hit, small hit or lost) is determined for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability) and low probability state (low probability)). Are determined in association with a jackpot determination random number value (the size of the jackpot determination random number: 65536). Specifically, the jackpot determination random number value is any of the determination values. Either big hit, small hit, or loss is determined depending on whether or not it belongs to. Therefore, even when the acquired jackpot determination random number values belong to the same determination value (the same value for the jackpot determination random number value), the current jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state. Depending on the situation, the winning type may be different, such as “big hit” on the one hand and “lost” on the other. The jackpot winning probability of this embodiment is about 1/397 in the low probability state, and about 1 / 39.7, which is about 10 times higher than that in the high probability state. The winning probability is about 1/200 regardless of the jackpot lottery probability state. In other words, the winning probability for the small hit is constant regardless of the big win lottery probability state, and in this respect, the personality is different from that of the above big hit whose fluctuation probability varies depending on the big win lottery probability state.

  If this winning lottery (pre-fetch winning determination) results in a “big hit” winning, the big hit determination flag is set to “5 AH (the big hit determination flag is ON)”, and if it belongs to other determination values, “ The big hit is not won (the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state). If the “small hit” win is selected, the small hit determination flag is set to “5AH (the small hit determination flag is ON)”, and if it belongs to other determination values, “small hit non-win (small) The hit determination flag is in the OFF state). Therefore, when the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value that is the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won, The current winning determination result is “lost” (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are in the OFF state).

  In the winning lottery by the special symbol change display game 2 (step S337 (see FIG. 11) during the special chart 2 starting port check process described later), the lottery using the “special figure 2 random number determination table” separately provided. Is done. In the special random number determination table for special figure 2 of the present embodiment, the determination area for the big win is the same (the winning probability for the big win is the same), but the determination value itself for the small win is not defined. In other words, in the special symbol fluctuation display game 1, the big win, the small hit, and the loss are targeted for the winning lottery, whereas in the special symbol variation display game 2, only the big win and the lost are targeted for the winning lottery. Of course, in the random number determination table for special figure 2 as well, the small hit may be determined as a winning lottery object.

  When the random number determination process in step S317 is completed, a special stop symbol data creation process is then performed (step S318). This special stop symbol data creation processing is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' processing, and here, 'prefetch determination (prefetch symbol determination: pre-determining "symbol lottery" related to the current operation holding ball. (Pre-judgment of winning (winning) type)) '.

  When entering the special stop symbol data creation process of step S318, first, the winning lottery result obtained by the random number determination process of step S317 is acquired, and the symbol table corresponding to this winning lottery result (aside from big hit, small hit and lost) (A big hit symbol table, a small hit symbol table, or a lost symbol table, which will be described later, is selected). Then, the random number value for special symbol determination acquired in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination, the symbol lottery for the current action holding ball, that is, the current action hold The lottery result (the symbol lottery result at the start of variation) of “special stop symbol creation processing (see S410 of FIG. 11 described later)” executed when the ball is subjected to the variable display operation is pre-readed.

(T-2. Symbol table)
In each of the symbol tables described above, a “special symbol determination random value (the size of the special symbol determination random value: 200)” and a determination region (determination value) for determining the winning type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are determined depending on which determination value the random number value for special symbol determination belongs to.

  The “special symbol determination data” is data for identifying a winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type). Open non-probable large hit A, 2R short open non-probable large hit B, 5R long open probable large hit, 5R long open non-probable large hit, 12R long open probable large hit, 12R long open non-probable large hit, 16R long open probable large hit, small hit A / This is data for identifying which of B and Loss (if there are multiple types of loss, the type of loss: for example, Loss A to C) is won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S411 in FIG. 12 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412 and a process related to execution control of jackpot game) (This is a special electric symbol management process (step S060) in FIG. 6.) The “special stop symbol number” designates a special stop symbol form to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. This is data and is used when the “stop symbol type” of the special symbol is specified on the main control unit 20 side.

(T-2-1. Big hit symbol table)
The jackpot symbol table of the present embodiment includes a “big hit symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a “big hit symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2 related to the special symbol variation display game 2. Is included. In each jackpot symbol table, a special symbol judgment random number value and a judgment value for determining the jackpot type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol judgment random number value is set to any judgment value. Depending on whether or not it belongs, any one of a plurality of types of jackpots is determined.

  In the jackpot symbol table 1, for example, when the special symbol determination random number value falls within the range of the determination values 0 to 9, a “2R short open latency big hit” win is won (symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability): 10 / 200), when it falls within the range of the judgment value 20 to 29, it becomes the “2R short open uncertain variation big hit” winning (symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability): 10/200), and when it falls within the range of the judgment value 80 to 149 "5R long open probability change big hit" wins (design selection rate: 70/200), if it falls within the range of judgment value 150-159, "5R long open non-probable big hit" wins (design selection rate: 20/200), If it falls within the range of the judgment values 160 to 189, the “12R length opening probability change big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 30/200), and if it belongs to the range of the judgment values 190 to 199, “12R length opening” Probability variation jackpot "win and become (symbol selectivity: 10/200), big hit type is determined in a predetermined pattern selectivity, determining a special symbol data and the special stop symbol numbers corresponding thereto is adapted to be determined.

  The jackpot symbol table 2 has the same basic configuration as the above jackpot symbol table 1, but differs from the jackpot symbol table 1 in the following points. The jackpot symbol table 2 is different from the jackpot symbol table 1 in a specific jackpot symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability). Specifically, when the special symbol determination random number value falls within the range of determination values 0 to 39, “2R short open non-probable big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 40/200), and determination values 41 to 80 If it belongs to the range, it will win the “12R long open probability variable big hit” (symbol selection rate: 40/200), and if it belongs to the range of the judgment value 80 to 199, it will be won (the symbol selection rate) : 120/200), “5R long open uncertain variable big hit”, “5R short open non-probable big hit”, and “2R short open non-probable big hit” do not exist. That is, the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 2 is more likely to be selected than the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 1, which is a symbol lottery advantageous to the player. As a result, the game development is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1. In particular, in the state with the electric support, the winning probability on the lower start opening 35 side is dramatically improved and the execution chance of the special symbol variation display game 2 is increased, so that the state with the electric support is a high base game state. In addition to the symbol lottery, the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

(T-2-2. Small hits design table)
The small bonus symbol table of the present embodiment is used for both the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2, and the random symbol value for special symbol determination is any one as in the configuration of the big bonus symbol table. Depending on whether or not it belongs to the determination area (determination value), the small hit type (any of small hits A to B) is determined with a predetermined symbol selection rate, and the corresponding special symbol determination data and special stop symbol number Is to be decided. The symbol selection rates for the small hits A to C can be set freely, but the relationship of the symbol selection probabilities is preferably “small hit A ≦ (or <) small hit B”. The reason is as follows. The small hit A is set to 2 times with the least number of CZ continuations, and the CZ period is the shortest. Therefore, even if it shifts to CZ, the tension to the latent state ends immediately, and the fun in CZ Lack. For this reason, rather than setting the small hit A to a relatively high symbol selection rate, it is better to increase the symbol selection rate of the small hit B in which the number of times close to the number of CZ continuations that can determine the latent state is set to four times. This is because it is effective in maintaining the tension to the latent state and improving the fun in CZ.

(T-2-3. Lost symbol table)
In the lost symbol table of the present embodiment, the “lost symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 relating to the special symbol variation display game 1 and the “lost symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2 relating to the special symbol variation display game 2 are included. And are included.

  The lost symbol tables 1 and 2 are classified according to whether the special symbol determination random number value belongs to one of the determination areas (determination values), as in the configuration of the big hit symbol table or the small hit table. (For example, either Loss A or Loss B) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and special symbol determination data and special stop symbol numbers corresponding thereto are determined. Note that the lost symbol table 1 and the lost symbol table 2 have different determination values related to the winning of the lost symbols A to B. Therefore, even if the random numbers for special symbol determination are the same value, the lost symbol table 1 is referred to. The case where the winning symbol table 2 is referred may be different from the case where the winning symbol table 2 is referenced. In this embodiment, the winning probability of Loss B is determined to be lower than the winning probability of Loss A. For example, the SP reach is selected when Loss B is won than when Loser A is won. The proportion of being played is increasing.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 described above is completed, a starting port winning random number determination process in step S319 is then performed. This start opening winning random number determination process is also performed as part of the 'look-ahead determination' process, similar to the random number determination process (step S317) and the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318). 'Prefetching determination (prefetching variation pattern determination)' is performed in advance to determine the “variation pattern at the start of variation” relating to the operation hold ball.

  Upon entering the start opening random number determination process, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317, the 'symbol lottery' result obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318, and the step S314 Using the 'random number for variation pattern' acquired in the process, the variation pattern at the start of variation related to the currently activated ball, that is, executed when the current activated ball is subjected to the variation display operation. The result (special pattern variation pattern creation processing (see S412 of FIG. 12 described later)) ”(the variation pattern content at the start of variation) is determined in advance. Then, based on the prefetch determination result, a creation process of winning command data (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used for creating a “hold addition command” described later is performed. The contents of the look-ahead variation pattern (excluding reserved ball number information) are designated by the winning command data (EVENT) determined in the starting port winning random number determination process. Note that the random number determination process in step S317 to the start port winning random number determination process in step S319 is a process related to 'pre-fetching determination ".

  When the random number determination process at the start opening winning in step S323 is completed, the winning command data on the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies the number of balls to be held at the time of the prefetch determination, and the lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the prefetch variation pattern A “pending addition command” composed of the winning command data is created (step S320), and is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 without being stored in the RAM 203 (step S326). As a result, the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start opening check process in step S302 of FIG. 11 is performed.

  The hold addition command is composed of 2-byte control data. Specifically, the upper byte (first byte (MODE) “BXH” (for example, B6H to B9H is special) is created according to the number of reserved balls and special symbol type (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2). ) Corresponds to the number of the balls 1 for holding the action of the symbol 1 and BBH to BEH correspond to the numbers of the balls 1 to 4 for the special symbol 2 respectively)))) The lower byte (“XXH” of the second byte (EVENT) is a value corresponding to the content of the prefetch variation pattern) created by the processing (see FIG. 5). Therefore, this pending addition command includes prefetch determination result information obtained in a series of processes (steps S315 to S317) relating to prefetch determination, specifically, information that can specify a prefetch variation pattern. However, when the lower byte (EVENT) value is a specific value (for example, “01H”), prefetch prohibition is designated.

  When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receives the lottery and performs a lottery (prefetch notice lottery) regarding whether or not to perform the prefetch notice effect based on information included in the hold addition command. If the result of the lottery is determined to be feasible (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the pre-reading for the currently activated ball at the start of the symbol variation display game or at a predetermined timing during the game Make a notice effect appear. In addition, when receiving the hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 may cause a “winning effect” to be displayed to notify that the winning has been won regardless of whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is to be displayed. it can.

  In addition, even when a new winning is made when the number of active balls is 4 or more, a holding addition command at the time of overflow winning (hereinafter abbreviated as “OF holding addition command”) is created, and the production control unit 24 is transmitted.

  Since the “OF hold addition command” is an overflow action hold ball, it is not used for the pre-reading determination but is used exclusively for the above “winning effect”. However, the following effects appear. Can be configured.

  For example, when the production control unit 24 receives the above-described OF hold addition command, if there is a “big hit (may include a small win)” among the current operation hold balls, this is indicated. You may comprise so that the notice effect (notice effect on hold at the time of OF winning) can be shown. In this case, when receiving the hold addition command, the production control unit 24 stores the prefetch determination information storage means for storing the prefetch determination information included therein, and when receiving the OF hold addition command, If there is a thing that becomes a “big hit (may include a small win)”, the fact that there is a possibility of a big hit is notified (you may decide whether to notify by a predetermined notification lottery) And an on-hold notice effect means.

  In addition, when the result of the currently running symbol fluctuation display game is “big hit (may include small hits)”, a notice effect (notice effect during fluctuation when OF winning) can be displayed. You may comprise. In this case, when the effect control unit 24 receives the OF hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 notifies that there is a possibility that the game result related to the current symbol variation is “big hit (may include small hits)” (predetermined It may be determined whether or not to notify by a notification lottery).

  The notice effect by such an OF hold addition command is similar to the over winning effect that appears when an overflow prize occurs, but the result of the symbol variation display game for which the final result has not yet been derived has been read-ahead. It plays the same role as the pre-reading notice effect in that

(8-2. Special Figure 2 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 11)
Next, the special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 starting port check process.

  The special figure 2 starting port check process, like the special figure 1 starting port check process, serves as a winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition. Here, the special symbol variation display game 2 In the same way as the flow of the special figure 1 start port check process described above, as the pre-start process for executing the process, the addition process of the number of suspended balls for operation, the process of storing various random numbers, the process of creating a pending addition command, etc. Processing is performed. Hereinafter, the same processing content as the above-described special figure 1 start opening check processing (step S301) will be described by omitting as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331).

  If no winning detection is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331: NO), the special figure 2 start opening check process is exited without doing anything. However, when the winning of the lower start opening 35 is detected (step S331: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is 4 or more (step S332).

  When the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S332: YES), the process proceeds to step S340. On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not 4 or more, that is, when it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), the special figure 2 operation reservation balls number is incremented by 1 (+1) (step S333). Proceed to processing.

  When the processing proceeds to step S334, various random numbers (random hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and variation pattern random number) used in the special symbol variation display game 2 related to the special symbol 2 operation holding ball generated this time. The current value of the random number counter is acquired and stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (step S334). This process is the same as the process in step S314 of FIG. The special figure 2 operation hold ball is stored in the order in which the start conditions are satisfied, with the maximum hold storage number as a predetermined upper limit value, until it is used for the variable display operation of the special symbol 2.

  Next, prefetch prohibition data (lower byte “01H”) prohibiting prefetch determination is acquired as winning command data (step S335), and it is determined whether or not the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied (step S335). S336). The “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 2 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 2 operation holding ball is not executed, and thereby the prefetch notice effect is not executed. (Step S336: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, when the game state is accompanied by a “game state with no electric support” state, that is, when the internal game state is in the normal game state or in the latent state, the special symbol 2 side is read ahead. Judgment is prohibited. Thus, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 2 side when the game state is accompanied by the state without the electric support is as follows.

  If it is in the “normal game state” or “latent state”, it is placed under the “no electric support” state, and the winning rate of the lower start opening 35 is significantly reduced. Further, as already described, in the present embodiment, when the player targets the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side in the state without the electric support, the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the left flow path 3b. This is a gameability that is disadvantageous for the player, such that the winning rate of the upper start opening 34 is significantly lower than the case where the above is determined. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not aim the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side during the state without the electric support. Therefore, in the absence of the electric support, it is not necessary to generate the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, and the prefetch determination is performed one by one for the special figure 2 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate. This is because there arises a problem that the control burden increases.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 1 side (prefetching prohibited state period) and the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 2 side can be switched according to the gaming state. It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which no pre-reading determination is performed on either the special symbol 1 side or the special symbol 2 side according to the gaming state. Also, during CZ, the expectation of the high probability state is drawn by the effect made under the corresponding dedicated CZ effect mode, and the CZ period is also relatively short, so during CZ, It is preferable that the prefetch determination is set as a prefetch prohibition section so that the prefetch notice effect is not displayed.

  Returning to the description of step S336 again, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the process proceeds to step S340. However, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S336: NO), the process proceeds to step S337, and random number determination processing is performed (step S337). In this random number determination process, “prefetching winning determination” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the processing method is substantially the same as the random number determination processing in step S317 during the special figure 1 starting port check processing of FIG.

  When the random number determination processing in step S337 is completed, special stop symbol data creation processing is then performed (step S338). In this special stop symbol data creation process, “prefetch symbol determination” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. The processing method is substantially the same as the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 during the special chart 1 start port check process of FIG.

  Next, the starting port winning random number determination process similar to that in the special figure 1 starting port checking process is performed (step S339), and a holding addition command is created based on the winning command data and the number of pending action balls (step S340). The pending addition command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S341), and the special figure 2 starting port check process is exited.

(8-3. Special symbol variation start processing: FIG. 12)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S305) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process of FIG.

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401). If the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), Proceeding to the process of S403, the process (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the change for the operation holding ball to be used for the current change display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S402). If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process proceeds to step S403, and the process (steps S403 to S416) related to the start of the variation of the special symbol for the suspended action ball used for the present variation display is performed. Do. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, “priority” indicating which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is to be preferentially used for the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Change order" is determined. The processing in steps S401 and S402 is performed as “priority change means” for preferentially digesting the special figure 2 operation holding ball when both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball exist. Function.

  In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball exists in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball by the priority changing means, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested, that is, The special symbol variation display game 2 is executed more preferentially than the special symbol variation display game 1. More specifically, on the condition that the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed, the first reserved storage area (first reserved storage means (the reserved storage area related to the operation reserved ball on the special symbol 1 side)). ) Is stored with the hold data relating to the special symbol 1 (first hold memory: special figure 1 operation hold ball), the second hold storage area (second hold storage means (the operation hold ball on the special symbol 2 side) If the second reserved data relating to the special symbol 2 (second reserved memory: special figure 2 operation holding ball) is not stored in the reserved memory area))), the second of the first reserved data When the second special hold data is stored in the second reserved storage area while the variable display of the first special symbol based on the previously stored reserved data is started, the first reserved The first hold data is stored in the storage area. Regardless of whether or not they are 憶, so as to start earliest variable display of the second special symbol based on the stored pending data out of the second pending data.

  In addition, when the number of operation hold balls of both the special figure 2 operation hold ball number and the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of “no operation hold ball” It becomes. This “no operation hold ball” state is when the special symbol is on standby and there is no hold memory, and the effect control unit 24 side is informed that it has entered this state, and the liquid crystal display The device 36 is controlled to switch to a demonstration screen display for waiting for customers. Therefore, when “no operation hold ball” is reached, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H)” indicating the state of “no operation hold ball”. (Step S417).

  When the determination process of step S417 is passed, that is, when the state of “no operation hold ball” is entered, and the special symbol operation status at this time is “standby (01H)” (step S417: NO: Refer to step S472 in the special symbol confirmation time process of FIG. 21A described later), and the special symbol operation status is switched to “standby (00H)” (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status: step S418). Then, a “demonstration display command” for displaying a demonstration screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. Thus, the reason for switching the special symbol operation status to “waiting (00H)”, transmitting the effect control command, and exiting the special symbol variation start process is as follows.

  If the demonstration display command is sent without condition when the number of active balls is zero, the demonstration display command is repeatedly transmitted at a period of 4 ms while the number of special figure active balls is zero. Will occur. Therefore, when the “no operation hold ball” state is reached, a demonstration display command is transmitted once, and if the demonstration display command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display command is sent to the effect control unit 24. This special symbol management process can be skipped without sending to the user.

  If the presentation control unit 24 does not receive any presentation control command (for example, a hold addition command) related to the symbol fluctuation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the demonstration display command, the fluctuation display operation is performed for a certain period of time. Assuming that an undisturbed state (a waiting state for waiting for customers) has occurred, the liquid crystal display device 36 performs a “demo screen display” for notifying that the game is waiting.

  If the number of special figure 1 action hold balls or the number of special figure 2 action hold balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), to start the change of the special symbol for the action hold ball for the current fluctuation display Such processing (steps S403 to S417) is performed. In addition, about the process of step S403-S417 demonstrated below, when it is "NO" by determination of said step S401, it is the process for the special figure 2 action holding ball, and by determination of said step S402. If it is NO ', it will be the process for the special figure 1 action holding ball, but the way of the process is the same, so in order to avoid duplication, the action on the special symbol 1 side unless otherwise required The description will be made without distinguishing whether the process is a process for the holding ball or a process for the operation holding ball on the special symbol 2 side.

  If it progresses to step S403, 1 will subtract the number of operation reservation balls (the number of operation reservation balls concerning the special symbol side used for the present variable display operation -1: step S403), The “subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404).

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the current variation start side. For example, if the special symbol 1 is the variation start side, “00H” is displayed, and the special symbol 2 is the variation start side. If there is, “01H” is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the hold data (random hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1,
And a random number for variation pattern) are read out and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage areas (hold 2 storage area, reserved 3 storage area) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) , The hold data stored in the hold 4 storage area) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared (step S407). That is, the hold data in the hold 1 storage area is shifted to the random number storage area for determination, and the hold data after the hold 2 storage area is numbered one by one (hold 2 storage area → hold 1 storage area, hold 3 storage). Area → holding 2 storage area, holding 4 storage area → holding 3 storage area) and overwriting, and providing an empty area in the holding 4 storage area (if no new active holding ball is generated, processing in step S407) Since the vacant area is sequentially shifted each time the operation is performed, the entire reserved storage area becomes an empty area when all the operating spheres are used. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number n of the operation reservation balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and any of the operation reservation balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is stored. Whether the area corresponds to the area is specified, and the storage of a new operation holding ball becomes possible.

  Next, remaining short time command transmission processing is performed (step S408). Here, it is determined whether or not a special symbol short-time counter (counter for counting the remaining number of times until the special symbol short-time state is terminated) described later is zero. A “remaining short time number command” including the remaining short time number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S408). By this “remaining short time number command”, the production control unit 24 side can grasp the remaining short time number, for example, using the effect means, can notify the remaining short time number information.

  Next, a random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is performed (step S409). In this special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed using the jackpot determination random number value. The random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is “random determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “winning lottery” is performed. In this example, the “winning lottery” in “determination at the start of change” is performed for the operation holding ball used for the current change display operation. Note that the processing procedure of the random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is substantially the same as the random determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10 and step S339 in FIG. 11). The description is omitted.

  Here, first, a hit random number determination table corresponding to the current variation display side is acquired based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. This winning random number determination table is the same as the “winning random number determination table” used in the random number determination processing (step S317 in FIG. 10 and step S337 in FIG. 11). Next, the big hit determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and another winning lottery of big hit, small hit, and loss based on the big hit determination random value and the hit random number determination table is performed.

  If this winning lottery results in a “big hit” win, the big hit determination flag is set to “5AH”, and if it belongs to other determination values, the “big hit non-winning” is set. In addition, when the “small hit” win is made, the small hit determination flag is “5AH”, and when it belongs to other determination values, the “small hit non-win” is set. Therefore, when the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value of the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won, The result of the winning decision this time is 'lost'.

  When the random determination process for determining the special electronic component operation in step S409 is completed, a special stop symbol creating process is then performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, the “symbol lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed by using the winning lottery result and the special symbol determination random number value of the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is the same as the “special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “design lottery” is performed. Here, the “design lottery” is performed in the “determination at the start of change” for the operation holding ball used for the current change display operation. The basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation process is the same as that of the special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10 and step S338 in FIG. 11). .

  Here, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery result (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag) obtained by the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409 are acquired, and based on these As the symbol table corresponding to the current variation display side, one of the big hit symbol tables 1 and 2, the small hit symbol table, and the lost symbol table 1 and 2 is selected. This symbol table is the same as the symbol table used in the special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11). Next, a special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random value, the “symbol selection lottery” related to the current special symbol variation display game is performed. To determine the winning type (winning type) related to the special symbol variation display game of this time.

  When the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is then performed (step S411). In the game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating the game state after the big hit game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Details of the game state transition preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game state transition preparation process in step S411 is completed, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then performed (step S412). In this special symbol variation pattern creation processing, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) (current game state), the winning lottery result obtained in the random determination processing for special electric accessory operation determination, the symbol of the special stop symbol creation processing Using a lottery result, a random number for variation pattern, and the like, the variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation is determined by lottery. Then, in order to inform the effect control unit 24 of the content of the variation pattern, a “variation pattern designation command” including variation pattern information that can specify the content of the variation pattern is created as an effect control command, and this is effect control Transmit to the unit 24 side. Note that the special symbol variation pattern creation process is a random number determination process at the time of winning a winning prize, which is one of the 'look-ahead determination' processing in terms of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, and a creation process related to the pending addition command (step of FIG. 10) S319 to S320, and processes similar to those in steps S339 to S340 in FIG. 11, but here, the variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation, that is, A variation pattern at the start of variation is determined.

  Here, first, a random number value for the fluctuation pattern is acquired, and then a “hit fluctuation pattern distribution table” or “losing fluctuation pattern distribution table” (not shown) is acquired based on the big hit lottery result (winning lottery, symbol lottery). . Then, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by variation pattern lottery using the variation pattern distribution table and the variation pattern random value.

(T-3. Fluctuation pattern distribution table)
The above-mentioned fluctuation pattern distribution table includes a “winning fluctuation pattern distribution table” that is selected when winning a win (big hit or small win), and a “fluctuation pattern changing pattern for loss” that is selected when winning a win. Minute table ".

  In each variation pattern allocation table, the variation pattern related to the special symbol includes the number of active suspension balls (the number of remaining operation suspension balls excluding the operation suspension balls used for the current variation display operation), the variation pattern allocation designation number ( Tcode) (current gaming state), jackpot lottery result (special stop symbol creation process (step S410) symbol lottery result), and variation pattern random number value is determined in association with the variation pattern random number, One of the variation patterns is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  As the variation pattern is determined, a “variation time determination table” corresponding to the variation pattern is also determined. In this “variation time determination table”, the variation time (symbol variation display operation time) is defined. By referring to the variation time determination table corresponding to the determined variation pattern, the variation of the present variation pattern The time will be fixed. This variation time is the game time (decorative symbol variation display time (effect time)) of the decorative symbol variation display game executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display game.

  Information on the variation pattern determined in this way mainly includes another winning / losing winning lottery result (in the case of this embodiment, the symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current Game state type, variable time, execution specification information for specific notice effect (specifying information such as presence / absence of reach effect, reach effect type (N reach type or SP reach type), presence / absence of pseudo-ream, number of pseudo-reams) Can do. The CPU 201 creates a “variation pattern designation command” that can specify the content, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24 side. When the effect control unit 24 receives the variation pattern designation command, the effect control unit 24 controls the appearance of the effect during the current symbol variation display game based on the variation pattern information included in the command. The variation pattern designation command may include symbol lottery result information.

  In the present embodiment, the same hit variation pattern is selected for the hit variation patterns at the time of 2R short open latent large win winning, 2R short open non-probable large win winning, small hit A and B winning. This is because it is preferable that the same variation pattern is selected in the case of winning the 2R big hit and in the case of winning the small hit, and it is preferable to make it unclear which win was won for production. It is.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 11 again, when the special symbol variation pattern creation processing in step 412 is finished, 5AH (ON state) is then set to the special symbol N variation flag (N = 1, 2) for designating that the variation is being displayed. ) Is stored (step S413). The “special symbol N changing flag” is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), the special symbol changes. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

  Next, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 (step S414), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). This decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) for designating a special symbol type on the variable side, and a lower byte (EVNET) for designating a big hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type. Therefore, the “decorated symbol designation command” includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning category (symbol lottery result). For example, the upper byte (MODE) side is set to “BBH” when the special symbol on the variable side is Special Figure 1, “BCH” is set to Special Figure 2, and the lower byte (EVENT) side is selected as winning. EVNET value corresponding to the type (value that can specify the hit type or the loss type: for example, “01H” for 2R short open latent big hit “02H” for 2R short open non-probable big hit, “02H”, 5R long open probability change “03H” for big hit, “04H” for 5R long open non-probable big hit, “05H” for 12R long open non-probable big hit, “06H” for 12R long open probable big hit, “06H” for 16R long open probable big hit In the case of “07H” and small hits A to B, “08H” to “09H”, etc.) are set. Since this decoration designating command includes winning type information, on the effect control unit 24 side, mainly a combination of decorative symbols (reach symbols) when forming a reach state, or a decorative symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. This is used when determining the combination of (decoration stop symbol).

  Then, as the change start time setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to “Fluctuating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the determination random number storage area (cleared to zero) (step S416). ).

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) of FIG. 9 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S059) is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S060) of FIG.

(8-3-1. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 13)
Next, the gaming state transition preparation process (step S411) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first acquires a big hit determination flag and determines the state of the big hit determination flag (step S431). If the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S431: ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything.

  When the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S431: = 5 AH), the big hit gaming state transition table selection table (see FIG. 30A) is acquired (step S432).

  Next, with reference to the acquired gaming state transition table selection table, a gaming state transition table (see FIG. 31) corresponding to the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the jackpot type (special symbol determination data) is acquired (step S433). ), Data determined in the gaming state transition table is stored in various buffers described later (step S434: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these buffers are read out in the jackpot end process (step S509 in FIG. 16) during the special electric utility management process described later, and are stored in predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (flag storage areas corresponding to the respective buffers). And the counter storage area). When the process of step S434 is completed, the game state transition preparation process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) of FIG. In this game state transition preparation process, a setting process related to a game state transition when a big win is won is performed, and a setting process related to a game state transition when a small win is won is an electric game management process described later. The small hitting process is performed (see step S504 in FIG. 16).

(T-4. Big hit game state transition table selection table: FIG. 30 (A))
FIG. 30A shows a big hit gaming state transition table selection table. In the jackpot gaming state transition table selection table of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of gaming state transition tables associated with a gaming state determination number (YJ) and a winning type (special symbol determination data: here a jackpot type) are determined. Specifically, based on the game state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data, one of a plurality of types of game state transition tables (game state transition for jackpot) Table) is selected.

  Here, the “gaming state determination number (YJ)” is data for identifying the internal gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table in FIG. 36, when the gaming state determination number (YJ) is “00H”, “normal gaming state (no power support state, low probability)” is set to “01H ”Is“ latent probability state (without electric support, high accuracy) ”,“ 02H ”is“ time-short state (electric support is present, low accuracy) ”, and“ 03H ”is“ probability change state ”. (Electric support state, high probability) ”. Therefore, the game state determination number (YJ) is different from the data for identifying the game state itself, such as the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), in that it identifies the internal game state as described above.

(T-5. Game state transition table: FIG. 31)
FIG. 31 shows the gaming state transition table described above. In the game state transition table of the present embodiment, “JTTBL-1” to “JTTBL-7” of the game state transition table for jackpots that can be selected in the case of jackpot, and the game for small hits that can be selected in the case of jackpot State transition tables “JTTBL-8” to “JTTBL-9” are included.

  In these game state transition tables, a plurality of types of data groups for designating game states to be transferred after winning games are defined. Specifically, the utility power release extended transition buffer, normal symbol short transition buffer, normal symbol likelihood transition buffer, special symbol short transition transition buffer, special symbol probability transition transition buffer, special symbol short transition counter buffer Various data to be stored in the special symbol probability variation counter buffer, the variation pattern distribution designation number buffer, and the special symbol variation count counter buffer are defined. The values stored in these buffers are read at a necessary timing and set in a predetermined flag storage area or a predetermined counter storage area provided in the RAM 203. When various data specified by each game state transition table are stored in each buffer, the game state after the winning game is determined.

  “JTTBL-1” to “JTTBL-7” in the game state transition table for jackpot according to the present embodiment are, in order, probability variation state, latent probability state, short time state (60 times), short time state (100 times), normal It is a game state transition table for shifting to a state, CZ (latency), and CZ (normal). Further, “JTTBL-8” to “JTTBL-9” in the game state transition table for small hits are game state transition tables for shifting to “CZ”, respectively. However, regarding “JTTBL-6” to “JTTBL-9” related to the CZ transition, “JTTBL-6” is CZ (latency: 4 times), and “JTTBL-7” is CZ continuation. CZ (3 times), “JTTBL-8” is CZ (2 times), and “JTTBL-9” is CZ (3 times). Game state transition table to be shifted to (time). The role of the various buffers described above will be described below.

(General power utility opening extension transition state buffer)
The “general utility release extension transition state buffer” is used to set a general utility release extension state flag. The “general utility release extension state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the release extension function. When the flag is ON (= 5 AH), The state is “present state”, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the open extension function is inactive and “no electric support” state.

(Normal symbol short transition buffer)
The “normal symbol short time transition state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol short time state flag. The “ordinary symbol short time state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the normal symbol short time function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “normal symbol short time state flag” indicating that the normal symbol short time function is in operation. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the normal symbol short function is not activated and the" normal symbol non-short state ".

(Normal symbol change transition buffer)
The “normal symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol probability change state flag. The “normal symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating an auxiliary lottery probability state, that is, an operating state of the normal symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the normal symbol probability changing function is set. It indicates that the state is the “probability change state per assistance” during operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that it is a “low probability state per assistance” in which the normal symbol probability change function is not activated.

(Special symbol short state transition state buffer)
The “special symbol short time state transition state buffer” is used for setting a special symbol short time state flag. The “special symbol time reduction state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the special symbol time reduction function. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol non-time-short state is inactive.

(Special Symbol Probability Transition Status Buffer)
The “special symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability change state flag. The “special symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “high probability state during the special symbol probability changing function is operating”. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol probability changing function is not activated in a “low probability state”.

(Special design short time counter buffer)
The “special symbol short time counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol short time counter. The above “special symbol time reduction counter” means the number of remaining times until the operation of the “special symbol time reduction function” is terminated due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the end. In the present embodiment, with the end of the special symbol short-time state, the high base gaming state, which is in the state of electrical support, is also ended (see step S481 in FIG. 15B).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol probability variation counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability variation counter. The above “special symbol probability change counter” means the remaining number of times until the operation of the “special symbol probability change function” is finished, that is, the “high probability state” is ended due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the number of times (remaining ST number).

(Variation pattern distribution specification number buffer)
The “variation pattern allocation designation number buffer” is used for setting the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode). This “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” is game state data for specifying a game state. The variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area of the RAM 203 and is changed based on a predetermined change condition (game state transition condition) (special symbol confirmation time processing (Fig. 15B) Steps S481, S486, S490, game state transition preparation processing (see S411 in FIG. 12, S434 in FIG. 13, special electric accessory management processing (FIG. 16), etc.).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol variation number counter buffer” is used for setting a special symbol variation number counter. The “special symbol variation counter” is a counter for counting the number of times of variation of a special symbol that is a gaming state transition condition (hereinafter referred to as “the prescribed number of gaming state transitions”). In the special symbol variation number counter of this embodiment, the CZ continuation number is set as the specified game state transition number, and this counter functions as a management means for managing the CZ continuation number.

(8-4. Special symbol change processing: Fig. 14)
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S307) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

  In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory action timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol change time has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a “variation stop command” indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451). S452). With this change stop command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol change display game has ended after the change time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops and displays (decision display) the decorative symbol that is currently being changed. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated along with the termination of the special symbol variation display game.

  Next, as a setting process at the time of stoppage of the special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol determination signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol determination timer of the RAM 203, and the fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), The special symbol operation status is switched to “confirming (03H)” (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol changing flag (step S453). Exit the special symbol change process. The “special symbol determination signal output time” is an extra time for securing the output time of the special symbol determination signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been determined and displayed. It is. The “determined display time” is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol change display is finished and the special symbol is stopped.

  When the process of step S453 is completed, the special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 of FIG. 9 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special symbol display process of step S060 of FIG. Proceed to the electric accessory management process.

(8-5. Special symbol confirmation time processing (variation stop processing): FIGS. 15A and 15B)
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

  15A and 15B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). The “determined display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S453 in FIG. 20). Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol movement status is switched to “standby (01H)”, assuming that the current special symbol fluctuation display game is over (special symbol action). (01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state determination number (YJ) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM 203 (step S473).

  Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big hit judgment flag is ON)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S475). Here, as various setting processes (pre-start process of the big hit game) at the time of the big hit symbol stop, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the big hit determination flag, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag, General power release extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, and special symbol variation count 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the counters, 00H (normal state specification) is stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), and a game state notification LED (not shown) is designated to be turned on / off. 00H is stored in the status notification LED output number, and the process during this special symbol confirmation time is exited. The “gaming state notification LED” is state notification means for notifying current game state information. The gaming state notification LED (state notification unit) of the present embodiment is used to notify whether or not the special symbol time-short state is set. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the game state notification LED (state notification means) according to the game state notification LED output number. For example, if the gaming state notification LED output number is “00H”, it means that the current state is not the special symbol short state (gaming state notification LED: off state (non-special symbol short state notification), and “01H”. Now, it is informed that it is in the special symbol short-time state (game state notification LED: lighting state (special symbol short-time state notification).

(When the big hit judgment flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). . When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S478. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S476: = 5 AH), various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit determination flag as various setting processes (small hit game start pre-processing) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of the small hit symbol stop are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

  When the processing proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining number of special symbol time reduction states) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short time counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol short time counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digest of the current fluctuation number, and the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S480).

  If the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of end times of the special symbol short time state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), setting processing at the time of short time end is performed assuming that the number of times of termination of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached (step S481). Here, 00H (OFF state) is changed for each of the utility power release extended state flag, the normal symbol time-short state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time-short state flag as setting processing at the time-short-time end. 00H is stored in the pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol time-short state designation) is stored in the gaming status notification LED output number. As a result, from the next game, the player is placed in a state without power support.

  When the setting process at the time-short end in step S481 is finished, a “short-time end command” indicating that the special symbol time-short state has ended (electric supportless state transition information) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command ( Step S482). Since the short end command is transmitted at the end of the current symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the next game is in the “no electric support” state before the next game starts.

  In the present embodiment, the transition from the electric support state to the no electric support state is a transition from the short-time state or the probability change state to the normal state, so the effect control unit 24 receives the “short-time end command”. For example, when starting the next decorative symbol variation display game, or in advance, the background image (background effect) for the “normal effect mode” is switched. In addition, as the launch position in the “no power support” state, an effect control process is performed for causing a “launch position guidance effect (left-handed notification effect)” to be directed to aim at the left-down flow path 3b. As a result, even if there is no operation holding ball when the current symbol variation display game ends (when the next symbol variation display game is not started), the effect mode related to the next symbol variation display game is shifted to. be able to.

  Next, when the processing proceeds to step S483, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). In this embodiment, when the probability variation state is established, the probability variation state continues until the next big hit (the number of STs is infinite), but the probability variation state ends in time even if the game is played all day long. The number of times (for example, 10,000 times) that does not occur may be set. In this case, it is substantially the same as the probability variation state continues until the next big hit. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that “10000 times” is set in the special symbol probability variation counter.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S484) as the current symbol variation variation digest, and the special symbol probability variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is determined to be zero (step S485).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST specified number of times (70 times) has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S487 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), the setting process at the end of probability variation is performed on the assumption that the number of variations of the special symbol has reached the ST specified number (here, 10000) ( Step S486). Here, as the transition setting process to the normal gaming state at the end of the latent probability state or the probability changing state, the normal utility release extended state flag, the normal symbol short state flag, the normal symbol probable state flag, the special symbol short state flag, In addition, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the special symbol probability changing state flags, 00H is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol short-time state designation) is stored in the gaming state notification LED output number. To do. Thereby, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability is placed from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  When the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486 is completed, the process proceeds to step S487, and whether or not the special symbol variation number counter is zero, that is, the specified number of game state transitions (in this embodiment, the CZ continuation number). Whether or not is zero is determined (step S487).

  If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S487: YES), the special symbol confirmation time is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S487: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S488) as the digest of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S489).

  If the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S489: NO), it is determined that the game state transition prescribed number has not been reached, and the processing during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), the game state transition setting process is performed on the assumption that the special symbol variation number has reached the prescribed game state transition number (step S490: variation pattern change). Minute designation number setting process). Here, a transition setting process of the game state after the CZ continuation count is completed is performed. In the present embodiment, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on whether the big hit lottery probability state at the end of CZ is a low probability state or a high probability state. Here, the game state determination number (YJ) is first acquired, and the current internal game state is the normal state (game state determination number (YJ) = 00H) or the latent state (game state determination number (YJ) = 01H). If the current internal gaming state is a normal state, that is, a low probability state, the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set to “00H” designating the normal state, and the current internal gaming state is a latent state, That is, if the state is a high probability state, the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is set to “02H” that designates the latent state. Thereby, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol in the “normal state” or “latent state” is selected. This step S490 process functions as a variation pattern selection condition switching means for performing switching control of a variation pattern selection condition (variation pattern selection mode) based on establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Next, a “game state designation command” including the game state information of the transfer destination is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S491). With this “gaming state designation command”, the effect control unit 24 grasps that “CZ” ends in the current symbol variation display game, and that the next game becomes “normal state” or “latent state”. Thereby, when starting the next symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 controls to switch to the background image (background effect) for the “normal effect mode” or the background image for the “latent effect effect mode”. An effect control process under the effect mode is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described gaming state designation command is transmitted before the variation pattern designation command relating to the next symbol variation display game is transmitted. For this reason, when receiving such a game state designation command, the production control unit 24 produces an effect for the current production mode before the variation pattern designation command related to the next symbol variation display game is sent. It is possible to switch from (for example, one background display) to another effect mode (for example, another background display). That is, before the variation pattern designation command related to the next symbol variation display game is sent, an effect related to the other variation mode appears, in other words, before the next symbol variation display game, The production related to the production mode can be made to appear. As a result, the player can perform the effects related to the next symbol variation display game even if there is no operation holding ball when the current symbol variation display game ends (when the next symbol variation display game is not started). There is an advantage that the mode can be grasped in advance.

  As described above, when the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is exited, the special symbol display data update processing in step S309 in FIG. 9 is performed, and then the special symbol management processing is exited, and the special electric equipment management in step S060 in FIG. Proceed to processing.

(9. Special electric equipment management process: FIG. 16)
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S060) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S060. This special electric accessory management process works as a special game control means.

  In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hitting flag (step S501). When the small hitting flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S501: = 5AH), the small hit for controlling a series of operations of the special variable winning device (open / closed opening / closing control) related to the small hit game. A process is performed (step S504), and this special electric accessory management process is exited.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH) and is not in the big hit game. Exit the special electric property management process.

When the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S502: = 5AH),
Processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric accessory status branching process). The “special electric accessory operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable prize winning devices 42 and 52. This status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM 203 is stored. Stored in

  In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, a process corresponding to the special electric accessory operation status value is called and executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special electric accessory is “starting process (00H)”, the big hit start process (step S505) is performed. In the case where the accessory actuating start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory actuating process (step S507) is in effect. In the case where the accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) is “ending process (04H)”, the jackpot end process (step S509) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 52 related to the big hit game is controlled. Here, “being started (00H)” indicates that the player is in a standby state before the jackpot game starts, and “operation start process (01H)” is that the player is in a standby state before starting the round game. “In operation (02H)” indicates that a round game is being executed, and “Continuing determination (03H)” indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. “Big jackpot end process in progress (04H)” indicates that the big hit game is ending. When one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is completed, the special electric accessory management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

  Hereinafter, the big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509) and the small hit process (step S504) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

<Big hit game control processing (steps S505 to S509)>
First, the big hit start process (step S505 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit start process.

(9-1. Big hit start processing: FIG. 17)
At the start of the big hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to “starting process (00H)” of the initial status value. Therefore, when a big hit is made, first, the big hit starting process is performed.

  In FIG. 17, first, the CPU 201 performs a setting process at the time of starting the big hit necessary for starting the big hit game (step S511: setting process at the time of starting the big hit). Here, as a setting process at the time of starting the big hit, 5 AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operating device operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operation starting process (01H)” (special electric accessory) 01H is stored in the object operation status), and 01H is stored in the continuous number counter. The above-mentioned “actual accessory continuous actuating device operation flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the accessory continuous actuating device. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the accessory continuous actuating device is operating. This indicates that the round game can be continued, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is inactive (round game cannot be continued). The “continuous number counter” is a counter for managing the number of continuous executions of the round game, and the current round number is stored here. Since the continuous number counter here is “01H”, the current round number indicates the 1Rth.

  Next, a jackpot start setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S512), referring to the jackpot start setting table, the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) according to the special symbol determination data (jacket type), The round display LED numbers are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the RAM 203, and the start interval time is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S513: setting processing for each special symbol determination data).

(T-6. Big hit start setting table)
In the jackpot start setting table, “special symbol determination data” for identifying the jackpot type and “maximum number of rounds, start interval time, and round display LED number” are defined in association with each other. “Maximum number of rounds, start interval time, and round display LED” are determined according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type). Here, the “start interval time” refers to the special variable winning device 40 or the special variable winning after the special symbol fixed display time has elapsed and the jackpot has been fixed (see step S471 in FIG. 21A in step S453 in FIG. 20). It is an interval period until the device 50 is activated, and indicates a time width (the first effect time before the first round game is performed) that defines an interval in which the opening effect is performed. The “round display LED number” is data specifying the notification mode of the round number display device 39b (round display LED: specified round number notification means), and specifies the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) of this big hit game. To do. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the round display LED according to the round display LED number.

  When the process of step S513 is completed, a “big hit start command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S514). The “hit start command” includes the current jackpot type information and the game status information at the time of the big win, and the production control unit 24 side performs a series of win production modes (opening production, This is used when determining a round effect (a series of hit effect scenarios including a round start effect, an in-round effect, an end effect), an ending effect, and the like.

  As described above, when the big hit starting process is completed, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing: FIG. 18)
Next, the special electric accessory activation start process (step S506 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory activation start process.

  In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S521). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, “interval time before starting round game” is set. As the interval time, the “start interval time” set in step S513 in FIG. 23 is monitored in the first round (1R), but when passing through this step S521 after the end of the 1R, Interval time before opening (interval time set in step S575 in FIG. 21 described later) "is monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S521: NO), this special electric accessory operation start processing is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, if the interval time before opening (in the case of the first round, the starting interval time) has elapsed (step S521: YES), the effect is displayed along with the opening operation of the big prize opening. As a control command, a “big prize opening opening command (round start command)” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S522). This “big prize opening opening command” includes the current win type, round game start information (round production start instruction information), and current round number information, and the production control unit 24 corresponds to the current round number. It is used when making a “round production” appear. Further, as in the present embodiment, in the case of a gaming machine having a plurality of types of prize winning openings, it is possible to include information that can identify the type of the prize winning opening that performs the opening / closing operation.

  Next, a special winning opening operating time setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S523), and a special winning opening operating time setting process is performed (step S524). In this special winning opening opening time setting process, the special winning opening operation time corresponding to the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds is referred to the special winning opening operation time setting table. To store.

(T-7. Grand prize opening operating time setting table)
The big winning opening operating time setting table defines the special winning opening opening operation time associated with the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds. The special symbol determining data (big hit type) and the current round number Depending on whether or not, the opening operation time of the big prize opening is determined. For example, in the case of 12R long opening probability variation big hit or 16R long opening probability variation big hit, 29800ms corresponding to the long opening time is 2800 short opening latent large hit or 2R short opening non-probability as the initial value. In the case of a big hit, 100 ms corresponding to a short opening time is set as an initial value.

  Next, 00H is stored (cleared to zero) in the special winning opening winning counter (step S525). The “big prize winning prize winning counter” is a counter provided in the RAM 203 for counting the number of winning prizes in the lower big prize winning opening 40 or the right major winning prize opening 50. There are a winning counter and a right winning entrance winning counter for the right winning entrance 50.

  Next, a special winning opening / closing operation setting process is performed (step S526). In this special winning opening / closing operation setting process, solenoid control data for the special winning opening solenoid 42c or the special winning opening solenoid 52c is created and set. With this data, the opening / closing operation pattern of the lower major prize opening 40 or the right major prize opening 50 is designated. Further, here, a “special electric accessory N operation flag (N = 1, 2)” is set for designating whether or not the special variable winning device that is controlled to open and close is in operation.

  The “special electric accessory 1 operation flag” is a flag used to determine whether or not the special variable winning device 42 is operating. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), It shows that the special variable winning device 42 is operating, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special variable winning device 42 is not operating. Further, the “special electric accessory 2 operation flag” is a flag used for determining whether or not the special variable prize winning device 52 is operating, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), When the special variable winning device 52 is in operation, and the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special variable winning device 52 is inactive. Note that the period during which the flag is ON (= 5 AH) between round games, that is, the period during which the special variable prize winning device is in operation, is after the grand prize opening is closed and then the special prize winning opening is closed. This is a period until the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) elapses. On the other hand, during the period in which the flag is OFF (= 00H) between round games, that is, the period during which the special variable winning device is not in operation, the next round game is performed after the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. It is a period in the interval time (20 ms) until the start. Note that if a special prize is generated at the special winning opening while the special electric accessory N operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it is regarded as an illegal winning and a predetermined error processing (large winning opening illegal winning error) is executed. It has come to be.

  When the special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process in step S526 is completed, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “in operation (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status) (step S527).

  As described above, when the special electric accessory activation start process is finished, the process proceeds to the right-hand notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory: FIG. 19)
Next, the special electric accessory operating process (step S507 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operating process.

  In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first performs a large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S551). In the big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing, the number of winning prizes of the big winning opening relating to the current big hit game is mainly counted, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning number has reached the maximum winning number. Details of the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing in step S551 is completed, the big winning opening opening / closing operation setting processing is performed (step S552). The special prize opening / closing operation setting process here is the same as the special prize opening / closing action setting process (step S526) during the special electric accessory activation start process of FIG. Description is omitted.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S553). Since the special winning symbol action timer is set with the special winning opening operation time, the determination process of step S533 determines whether or not the special winning action operation time has elapsed. Become. Until the special symbol accessory operating timer becomes zero (step S553: NO), the special electric accessory operating process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol feature action timer reaches zero (elapsed time for opening the big prize opening operation time) (step S553: YES), a "round end command" is produced, assuming that the big prize opening in this round game is closed. It transmits to the control part 24 (step S554). This “round end command” includes the current win type, round game end information (round direction end instruction information), and current round number information, and on the side of the effect control unit 24 during the interval time between round games. Used when the “round end production” appears. Further, as in the present embodiment, in the case of a gaming machine having a plurality of types of prize winning openings, it is possible to include information that can identify the type of the prize winning opening that performs the opening / closing operation.

  Next, various setting processes when the round game ends are performed (step S555). Here, as various setting processes at the end of the round game, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Continuing judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special symbol accessory operation timer is set. The remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1980 ms) is stored.

  In this embodiment, the remaining ball discharge time set after each round game is described as the same time width (1980 ms), but the present invention is not limited to this. Since the remaining ball discharge time is determined as an allowance time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening after the big prize opening is closed, the internal structure of the big prize opening (for example, the right big prize opening sensor) This is necessary until the right big prize opening sensor 52a detects a gaming ball (or until the gaming ball is discharged to the outside from the big prize opening) in consideration of the maximum path length until 52a detects the gaming ball. The time width that allows for the maximum time is set. However, in one big hit game, when the round game is controlled to a plurality of types of operation modes according to the number of rounds, or when different big prize opening is controlled according to the number of rounds, It may be configured such that different remaining ball discharge times are set by paying attention to the operation mode. For example, paying attention to the fact that the winning rate to the big prize opening is relatively low during the round game related to the short opening time, the game balls are frequently bitten by the open / close doors 42b and 52b and the number of gaming balls in the big prize opening Since congestion is not expected, the remaining ball discharge time having a relatively shorter time width than that during the round game related to the long open time may be used.

  As described above, when the special electric accessory operating process is exited, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-3-1. Large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing: FIG. 20)
Next, the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S551 in FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the special winning opening / closing operation setting process.

  In FIG. 20, first, the CPU 201 sequentially determines the state of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the state of the special electric agent 2 operation flag (steps S561 and S562). When both the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag are in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S561: ≠ 5AH and step S562: ≠ 5AH), that is, the special variable winning device 42 Is not in operation and the special variable winning device 52 is not in operation, the process exits the maximum winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process without doing anything. The “when the special variable winning device 42 is not in operation and the special variable winning device 52 is not in operation” during the big hit game is during the pre-release interval time.

  When one of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH) (step S561: = 5 AH, or step S561: ≠ 5 AH, and step S562: = 5 AH), It is determined whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the big winning opening (step S563). A winning (winning ball) to the big winning opening is detected by the lower big winning opening sensor 42a or the right large winning opening sensor 52a. When no winning (winning ball) is detected at the big winning opening (step S563: NO), the processing of exiting the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

  When a winning is detected at the big winning opening (step S563: YES), 1 is added to the big winning opening winning counter corresponding to the big winning opening where the winning is detected (step S564: large winning opening winning counter adding process). Here, when a winning is detected at the lower major winning opening 40, the lower major winning prize winning counter is incremented by 1, and when a winning is detected at the right major winning opening 50, one is added to the right major winning prize winning counter. .

  When the big winning opening winning counter addition process of step S564 is completed, a normal winning command transmission process is performed (step S565). In this normal winning command transmission process, a “normal large winning opening winning command” for the winning ball before the over winning is transmitted. In the present embodiment, every time there is a winning, a normal big winning mouth winning command corresponding to the big winning mouth type is transmitted. Specifically, when a winning is detected at the lower major winning opening 40, the “large winning opening winning command 1” for designating that the lower major winning opening 40 has been won is detected, and a winning is detected at the right major winning opening 50. If it is, the “large winning opening winning command 2” for designating that the right winning winning opening 50 has been won is transmitted.

  Each of the winning prize winning commands 1 and 2 includes information that can identify the winning prize type and information related to over winning (in this case, not over winning (non-over winning designation information)). In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), the winning prize mouth winning commands 1 and 2 are data on the higher byte side (MODE) for designating the winning prize mouth type (the lower winning prize mouth 40 side is “ FDH ", the right big prize opening 50 side is" FEH "), and the lower byte side (EVENT) data (0DH) for designating non-over winning prizes.

  Information included in the winning prize winning commands 1 and 2 is, on the side of the effect control unit 24, winning prize winning effect (large winning mouth normal winning effect), for example, the above-mentioned winning number notification effect during round and the number of acquired balls It is used for the performance and the appearance of a normal winning opening effect corresponding to the lower winning opening 40 or the right winning opening 50. The production control unit 24 recognizes that a prize for the big prize opening has occurred (including no over-winning) by the normal big prize mouth prize command (large prize mouth prize commands 1 and 2), and the regular big prize prize is received. Count the number of times a winning command is received (number of times received) or receive a regular big winning mouth winning command to calculate the number of winnings and the number of winning balls, so that the number of winning prizes is announced and acquired during the round. The ball number notification effect can be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, even when the general winning opening 43 is won, a dedicated general winning opening winning command is transmitted, and the effect control unit 24 notifies the acquired number of balls due to the acquired number of balls notification effect. At this time, when a general winning opening winning command is received, the number of winning balls (10) corresponding thereto is added to the number of acquired balls and displayed. As a result, the number of acquired balls in the hit game is more accurately notified.

  It should be noted that the determination of which command of the winning prize opening winning command 1 or 2 is to be transmitted can be made based on the detection information of the lower winning prize sensor 42a or the right winning prize sensor 52a. Specifically, when a detection is made by the lower prize winning opening sensor 42a, a 'large winning prize winning prize command 1' is transmitted, and when a detection is made by the right big winning prize opening sensor 52a, a 'big winning prize winning prize is received. Send command 2 '. In addition, based on the setting state of the special electric accessory actuating flag, it is possible to determine which normal big prize winning prize command is to be transmitted. Specifically, when the special electric accessory 1 operation flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), since the special variable winning device 42 is in operation, the “special prize winning prize command 1” is transmitted and the special electric winning combination is transmitted. When the product 2 operation flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), since the special variable winning device 52 is operating, the “large winning opening winning command 2” is transmitted.

  During the process of confirming the maximum number of winning prizes, a “normal winning prize winning command” for each big winning prize is sent for each winning prize until the number of winning prizes reaches the maximum winning number. ('Step S563: YES to S566: NO' processing route). Since the over winning ball is a winning ball when the maximum number of winnings is exceeded, it is not a monitoring target in the large winning mouth maximum winning number confirmation process. For the over winning ball, in step S581 in the “special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (FIG. 21)” described later, which is executed after the grand prize opening is shifted to the closed state (after the special prize opening closing condition is established). It is monitored in the “big winning opening over winning number confirmation process”.

  When the normal winning command transmission process of step S565 is completed, it is then determined in step S564 whether or not the large winning opening winning counter after the addition process has reached the maximum number of winning (for example, 9) (step). S566). If the maximum number of winnings has been reached (step S566: YES), the special symbol accessory operation timer is cleared (step S567), and the maximum winning number maximum winning number confirmation process is exited, and the maximum number of winnings has not been reached. (Step S566: NO), nothing is done and the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing is exited.

  As described above, when the large winning opening maximum winning number confirming process is completed, the process proceeds to the large winning opening / closing operation setting process in step S552 of FIG.

(9-4. Special Electric Goods Operation Continuation Determination Process: FIG. 21)
Next, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process.

  In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S571). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, the remaining ball discharge time set after the closing of the big prize opening is set (see step S555 of FIG. 19), so in the determination process of step S571, the remaining ball discharge is performed. It is determined whether time has passed.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer is not zero (step S571: NO), a “large winning mouth over winning number confirmation process” for confirming the winning ball of the big winning mouth within the remaining ball discharge time is performed (step S581). . Details of the large winning opening over winning number confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time has elapsed) (step S571: YES), the continuous number counter is acquired and the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of specified rounds. It is determined whether or not (step S572).

  If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached (step S572: NO), the processing at the later-described steps S573 to S576 (round continuation processing) is performed as processing when the round game is continued. However, when the maximum number of rounds has been reached (step S572: YES), processing at steps S577 to S580 (round continuation end processing) is performed as processing at the time of ending the round game.

(Round continuation processing: steps S573 to S576)
When the current number of rounds has not reached the maximum number of rounds (step S572: NO), the processing route of steps S573 to S576 is performed as the round game continuation processing.

  First, in the process of step S573, 1 is added to the continuous number counter (+1) by the end of the current round game (step S573).

  Next, a special electric accessory end interval setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S574). With reference to the special electric accessory end interval setting table, the special symbol determination data and the continuous counter after the addition are obtained. The corresponding “interval before opening” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S575).

(T-8. Special electric accessory end interval setting table)
The pre-release interval time associated with the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the continuous number counter is defined in the special electric accessory end interval setting table. Specifically, the pre-release interval time is determined according to the special symbol determination data and the current value of the continuous number counter (the continuous number counter value after the addition processing in step S573: the next round number). Yes.

  In the present embodiment, the interval time before opening set after each round game has the same time width (20 ms), but the present invention is not limited to this.

  During the interval before opening, the special electric accessory operation flag is set to the OFF state (= 00H) in the process of step S576 described later. Accordingly, the pre-opening interval time is a large winning opening prize invalid period in which the winning at the big winning opening is invalid (an illegal winning monitoring period during the big hit). There is no particular limitation on the interval time before opening, but since it is provided as an interval time between round games including the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms in this embodiment), the time is set to an extremely long time, for example, about several seconds. If this happens, the waiting time between round games increases and the player feels annoying. In particular, in a big hit game with a maximum number of rounds of 15R, the total waiting time between round games is several tens of seconds to nearly one minute, which is not preferable.

  Therefore, the interval time before opening in this embodiment is set to a short time of 20 ms. This is because when the game ball actually enters the winning opening and the ON signal of the winning detection switch is output, the output time (signal duration) is the longest although the rolling time of the winning ball is long or short. This is in consideration of about 20 ms. Goto action (for example, goto action (selgoto) aiming at excessive prizes using plastic plates or piano wires at the big prize opening, or fraudulent persons misoperating the switch using illegal equipment (illegal radio transmitters, magnets, etc.) It is expected that ON signals from the large winning opening sensors 42a and 52a are frequently output when there is an illegal continuous winning due to a goto action that is activated to aim for excessive winning. Therefore, it is considered that there is no problem in monitoring illegal winnings between round games even if the interval time before opening is set to about 20 ms which is a proper ON signal signal duration. Preferably, it is considered that it is easier to detect fraud in the case of a longer time than that, but in consideration of the waiting time between round games, the interval time before opening is in the range of about 20 ms to several hundred ms. It is considered appropriate to set in However, the remaining ball discharge time may be set to a relatively short time depending on the form of the special winning opening (internal structure or the like). In this case, “remaining ball discharge time ≦ interval time before opening” may be set. For example, when the interval time between round games is set to 2000 ms, “the remaining ball discharge time is 1000 ms and the interval time before release is 1000 ms” or “the remaining ball discharge time is 500 ms and the interval time before release is 1500 ms”. May be.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 21 again, when the process of step S575 is completed, various setting processes for continuing the round are performed (step S576). Here, as a setting process for starting the next round game after the end of the current round game, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to “operation start process”. “Middle (01H)” (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

  When the above steps S573 to S576 (round continuation process) are finished, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(Round continuation end processing: steps S577 to S580)
On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds (step S572: YES), the processing route of steps S577 to S580 is performed as round continuation termination processing.

  First, in the process of step S577, an accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S577), and this accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table (not shown) is referred to. Then, the “end interval time” corresponding to the special symbol determination data and the added continuous number counter is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S578).

(T-9. Actor continuous operation device operation end interval setting table)
In the above-mentioned accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table, the special symbol determination data and the end interval time are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the end interval time is determined according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type). Is to be decided. This “end interval time” is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and is a time that defines the section in which the ending effect is performed Refers to the width. During the end interval time, the special electric accessory actuating flag is set to the OFF state (= 00H) in the process of step S579 described later. Accordingly, during the end interval time, as in the interval time before opening, it becomes a large winning opening prize invalid period in which winning to the big winning opening is invalidated.

  When the process of step S578 is completed, various setting processes at the end of the round are performed (step S579). Here, as the setting process when reaching the maximum round, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “ending process (04H)” (special electric accessory) 04H is stored in the operation status).

  Next, a “big hit end command” instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S580). This "hit end command" includes information regarding the current jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, that is, information that can specify the gaming state (including the internal gaming state) after the jackpot game is finished. It is also used when determining the effect mode after the big hit game on the control unit 24 side. Therefore, this “hit end command” has a role as a game state designation command for designating a game state since it can specify a game state after the end of the big hit game in addition to the role of instructing the start of the ending effect. Yes. The effect control unit 24 determines the effect mode based on the information included in the jackpot end command so that the game state after the jackpot end can be matched with the effect mode related to the game state. It has become.

  In addition, the information that can specify the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit may include information on the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) or information on the variation pattern allocation designation number and information on the internal gaming state. it can. The jackpot end command may be a single command or a plurality of commands. In the case of a plurality of commands, for example, information that makes it possible to specify the current jackpot type in one jackpot end command, and information that makes it possible to specify the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot in another jackpot end command These commands can be transmitted simultaneously or sequentially to the effect control unit 24 at a necessary timing. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of types of information are included in the effect control command and transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the information may be included in a single effect control command and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The effect control unit is divided into an effect control command including one information and an effect control command including other information, and the role of the single effect control command is divided into a plurality of effect control commands. It is good also as a structure which transmits to 24.

  As described above, when the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is terminated, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-4-1. Large winning opening over winning number confirmation processing: FIG. 22)
Next, the process of confirming the number of winning prizes over winning prizes (step S581 in FIG. 21) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing details of the big winning opening over winning number confirmation process. It should be noted that the process for confirming the number of winning prizes over the winning prize is similar to the process for confirming the number of winning prizes at the maximum winning prize (step S551 in FIG. 19, FIG. 20). The same processing contents as the confirmation processing will be described while being omitted as appropriate.

  In FIG. 22, first, the CPU 201 sequentially determines the state of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the state of the special electric agent 2 operation flag (steps S601 and S602). If both the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag are in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S601: ≠ 5AH and step S602: ≠ 5AH), this grand prize is done without doing anything. Exit the over-winning confirmation process

  When either of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH) (step S601: = 5 AH, or step S601: ≠ 5 AH, and step S602: = 5 AH), It is determined whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the big winning opening (step S603). When no winning is detected at the big winning opening (step S603: NO), the process exits the large winning opening over winning number confirmation process without doing anything.

  When a winning is detected at the big winning opening (step S603: YES), 1 is added to the big winning opening winning counter corresponding to the big winning opening where the winning is detected (step S604: large winning opening winning counter adding process). Here, when a winning is detected at the lower major winning opening 40, the lower major winning prize winning counter is incremented by 1, and when a winning is detected at the right major winning opening 50, one is added to the right major winning prize winning counter. . Here, the big prize opening prize counter addition process has the same processing content as the big prize opening prize counter addition process in step S564 of FIG.

  Next, the special winning opening winning counter is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the counter value exceeds the maximum winning number (step S605). Here, the large winning opening winning counter on the large winning opening detecting the current winning is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the counter value exceeds the maximum winning number. It is to be noted that the counters for each big winning opening (the big winning opening winning counter for the lower winning opening 40 and the large winning opening winning counter for the right large winning opening 50) are respectively confirmed, and whether or not the maximum winning number is exceeded. However, in order to reduce the control burden, it is preferable to have a simple configuration in which the big winning opening counter on the big winning opening side where the winning is detected is simply confirmed.

  When the big prize winning prize counter does not exceed the maximum number of wins (step S605: NO), normal command transmission processing is performed (step S606). When the normal command transmission process is executed, in this round game, the prize winning ball does not reach the maximum number of winnings, and the prize winning opening operation time elapses and the prize winning opening is closed. This is the case. The normal winning command transmission process here has the same processing content as the process in step S565 of FIG.

  On the other hand, if the grand prize opening winning counter exceeds the maximum number of winnings (step S605: YES), that is, if the winning ball detected this time is an over winning ball, an over winning winning command transmission process is performed (step S605). S607: OV winning command transmission process).

(OV winning command transmission process: step S607)
In the over-winning winning command transmission process in step S607, an “OV winning big winning opening winning command” for the over winning ball is transmitted. In the present embodiment, every time there is an overwinning, an OV winning big winning opening winning command corresponding to the big winning opening type is transmitted. Specifically, when an over winning ball is detected at the lower university winning opening 40, the “large winning opening winning command 3” for designating that an over winning has occurred at the lower university winning opening 40 is displayed. If a winning is detected at 50, a “big winning opening winning command 4” is transmitted to designate that an over winning has occurred at the right big winning opening 50. The determination of which command of the big prize winning prize winning commands 3 and 4 is to be transmitted is the same as the transmission process of the normal big winning prize winning prize winning commands 1 and 2 already described. 42a or the right big prize opening sensor 52a can be determined based on the detection information of the special electric accessory actuated flag.

  The above-described winning prize winning commands 3 and 4 include information that can identify the winning prize type and information related to over winning (in this case, information that an over winning has occurred (over winning designation information)). . In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the winning prize winning commands 3 and 4 are data on the upper byte side (MODE) for designating the winning prize type (the lower winning prize opening 40 side is “ FDH ", the right big winning opening 50 side is" FEH "), and the lower byte side (EVENT) data (7FH) for designating the over winning is composed of 2 bytes.

  The information included in the winning prize winning command 3 and 4 is mainly used for the appearance of an over winning effect corresponding to the lower winning prize port 40 or the right winning prize port 50 on the effect control unit 24 side. It is also used for the appearance of the number of winning prizes notification effect and the number of balls received notification effect. The production control unit 24 grasps that the over winning is generated by the OV winning large winning opening winning command, and counts the number of times the OV winning large winning opening winning command is sent (the number of times of reception). Knowing the cumulative number of winnings and notifying information about over winnings using a clock-type accessory (production means such as the number display unit 80 (number sector 80a) and the clock hand 97), or a large winning opening for OV winnings Each time a winning command is received, information on over-winnings or cumulative over-winnings can be displayed on the LCD screen, or the number of winning balls obtained by adding the number of winning balls due to over-winnings can be displayed. (See step S813 in FIG. 28, step S854 in FIG. 29A, step S873 in FIG. 29B, etc., which will be described later).

  When the normal winning command transmission process in step S606 or the over winning prize command transmission process in step S607 is finished, the large winning opening over-winning number confirmation process is exited.

  As described above, when the over-winning number confirmation process is exited, the special electric accessory continuation determination process (S509) is exited as it is until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero, that is, until the remaining ball discharge time elapses ( Step S571 of FIG. 21: NO), the large winning opening over winning number confirmation process is repeated. As a result, over-winning balls within the large winning opening effective winning period are monitored.

(9-5. Big hit end processing: FIG. 23)
Next, the big hit ending process (step S509 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit end process.

  In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the above-described end interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined whether or not the end interval time has elapsed in the determination process of step S591. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S591: NO), the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the end interval time has elapsed) (step S591: YES), it is set in the game state transition preparation process (step S411 in FIG. 15) as part of various settings at the end of the big hit. The values of the respective transition state buffers are stored in the respective state flags and counters shown (step S592). Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit game is designated.

  Subsequently, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are performed (step S593). Here, the various flags and buffers shown in the figure are cleared to zero (stores 00H) as various data used during the big hit game control process. Then, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Starting process (00H)” (00H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

  Note that the special symbol determination data is not subject to clearing because it is used for final display on the special symbol display device until the symbol variation display game is started after the big hit game. The special symbol determination data is stored in the RAM 203 (special symbol determination) when the special symbol creation processing (step S410 in FIG. 12) during the special symbol variation start processing is performed after the current big hit game ends. There is no problem because the data storage area) is overwritten.

  Next, a game state notification information update process for updating the game state notification information is performed (step S594). In the present embodiment, in order to notify whether or not it is in the special figure short time state by the gaming state notification LED, in the game state notification information update process, the special symbol short time state flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) or in the OFF state. Whether or not (≠ 5AH) is confirmed, and in the case of the ON state, a predetermined gaming state notification LED output number for designating the special state short time state is stored as data for lighting the gaming state notification LED.

  Thus, a series of control processes related to the big hit game is completed. After exiting the big hit end process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<Small hit game control processing>
(9-6. Small hit processing)
Next, the small hit process (step S504) will be described.

  In the small hit game, the “round game” like the big hit game is not executed. Therefore, as described above, the operation mode during the small hit game is “2R latent big hit game”, “2R normal big hit game A”, “2R normal big hit game B” (hereinafter, “2R series big hit game”). The process for controlling the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is performed so as to be substantially the same as the operation mode of “abbreviated“) ”. In the present embodiment, since the small hit is a big hit lottery object on the special figure 1 side, here, processing for controlling the opening / closing operation pattern of the lower big prize winning opening 40 is performed.

  When the small hit processing is entered, first, the “start interval time” in the small hit game is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and a “small hit start command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. . The “small hit start command” includes information on the type of small hit this time and game state information at the time of winning the small hit, and a series of hit effect modes developed during the small hit game on the effect control unit 24 side. It is used when determining (a series of hitting effect scenarios including an opening effect, a pseudo round effect, an ending effect, etc.).

  After the start interval has elapsed, a “small hit game state transition preparation process” for specifying a gaming state after a small hit game, which will be described later, is performed, and subsequently, the opening / closing operation of the lower big prize opening 40 is “2R system big hit. Solenoid control data for controlling the lower grand prize winning solenoid 42c is set so that the operation mode is the same as or very similar to “game”. As a result, the lower prize winning opening 40 is opened like a 2R system big hit game, and a pseudo round game during the small hit game is executed. It should be noted that the maximum number of winnings in the lower prize winning opening 40 during the small hit game is the same as that due to the big winning (for example, 9), and when the maximum winning number is reached, the lower winning prize opening 40 is closed. Migrated. However, since the round game like the big hit game is not executed in the small hit game, the pseudo round game itself is ended when the maximum winning number is reached.

  If there is a prize at the lower big prize opening 40 during the small hit game, as in the case of the big hit game, until the maximum number of wins is reached, the “big big prize prize for regular use” is awarded for each small prize. Command (for example, a big prize opening prize command 5) "is transmitted, and when an over-winning occurs, a" big prize winning prize winning command (for example, big prize opening prize command 6) "for a small hit is sent. The

  Therefore, the occurrence of an over win during the small hit game occurs when the maximum number of wins is exceeded throughout the small hit game. However, in the small hit game of the present embodiment, since the lower large winning opening 40 is opened and closed with a short opening pattern, it is impossible to generate an over winning, and the transmission itself of the OV winning large winning opening winning command is restricted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, depending on the game performance, the operation mode during the small hit game may be different from the operation mode of the 2R system big hit game. In this case, in a pseudo-round game, the lower large winning opening 40 is opened and closed in a long open pattern so that an over winning can be generated in the small hit game. It is good also as a structure which transmits a winning opening winning command and makes a predetermined over winning effect (for example, over winning effect for small hits) appear.

  When a plurality of types of small hits are provided, in one small hit game (for example, a small hit game by small hit A), the big winning opening is opened and closed with a short opening pattern, and another small hit game (for example, a small hit game) In the small hit game by the hit B), the big winning opening may be opened and closed in a long open pattern, and when an over win is generated in the other small hit games, an over winning effect may be displayed. Also, in both the small win game and the other small hit games, the big prize opening is opened and closed with a long open pattern, and if an over win occurs during any of the small win games, an over winning effect can appear. You may comprise. In addition, in both one small hit game and the other small hit games, the big winning opening is opened and closed with a long open pattern, and if an over winning is generated during the other small winning games, an over winning effect is displayed. Alternatively, when an over winning is generated during another small hit game, an over winning effect may be displayed. With the configuration as described above, an over-winning effect can appear even during a small hit game, so that the fun of the small hit game can be improved.

  Returning to the description of the small hit processing again, when the series of opening / closing operations of the lower big prize opening 40 related to the small hit game is completed, a “small hit end command” instructing the start of the ending effect is sent to the effect control unit 24. Send. The “small hit end command” includes information that can specify the type of the small hit this time and the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit, and the effect control unit 24 determines the post-small hit effect mode. It is also used when Therefore, in addition to the role of instructing the start of the ending effect, this small hit end command also plays a role as a gaming state designation command for designating the gaming state, and an effect that functions in the same way as the “big winning end command” related to the big hit game Control command.

(9-6-1. Game state transition preparation process for small hits)
Next, the small hit game state transition preparation process will be described.

  In the small hit game state transition preparation process, a setting process for specifying the game state after the small hit game is performed in order to specify the game state after the small hit game. Specifically, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is acquired first, and then the gaming state transition table selection table for small hits (FIG. 30 (B)) is acquired. Then, referring to the gaming state transition table selection table for small hits, the gaming state transition table “JTTBL-8” or “JTTBL” based on the current variation pattern allocation designation number and the small hit type (special symbol determination data) -9 "is obtained, and the game state transition table is referred to, and the corresponding data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 (variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and special symbol variation number counter). Thereby, the game state after the small hit game is designated.

(T-10. Game state transition table selection table for small hits: FIG. 30 (b))
FIG. 30 (b) shows a small hit gaming state transition table selection table. The game state transition table selection table for small hits according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of small numbers associated with a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and a winning type (special symbol determination data: here, a small hit type). The winning game state transition tables “JTTBL-8” and “JTTBL-9” are defined. Specifically, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and the special symbol determination data for identifying the small hit type Based on the above, one of the game state transition tables (game state transition table for small hits) is determined from among a plurality of types of game state transition tables.

(T-11. Game state transition table for small hits: FIG. 31 (b))
With reference to FIG. 31 (b), the small hit gaming state transition tables “JTTBL-8” to “JTTBL-9” will be described. These small hit gaming state transition tables include data for storing in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter as data for designating the gaming state to be transferred after the small hit game. It has been established. When these data values are stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter, the gaming state after the small hit game is identified. Here, in “JTTBL-8” to “JTTBL-9”, only the data to be stored in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number buffer and the special symbol fluctuation number counter buffer is determined. However, there is no transition of the internal gaming state, and only the transition of the gaming state as the variation pattern selection mode (change of the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode)) is performed.

  In the small hit game state transition table selection table, the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the normal state (variation pattern distribution designation number 00H) or CZ (variation pattern distribution designation number 06H). Only in some cases, either the small hit game state transition table “JTTBL-8” or “JTTBL-9” is selected. That is, when the gaming state is a probability variation state (variation pattern allocation designation number 01H), a latent probability state (variation pattern allocation designation number 02H), and a short time state (variation pattern allocation designation number 03H), the gaming state transition No, the game state at the time of winning the small hit is continued, and if the small win is won during CZ, either the small hit game state transition table “JTTBL-8” or “JTTBL-9” is selected again Thus, the number of CZ continuations is reset according to the small hit type (see FIG. 31 (B)).

  After exiting the above small hit process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 24 to 29A, FIGS. 32 to 35>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29A and FIGS. 32 to 35, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The process on the side of the effect control unit 24 mainly includes a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 24) and a timer interrupt process (effect control side timer interrupt process: FIG. 26) activated by a scheduled interrupt. It is comprised including.

<11. Production control side main processing: FIG. 24>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a main process (effect control side main process) on the effect control unit side. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 24 when the gaming machine main body is turned on from the outside.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S071). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, moving object starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of CPU internal register values including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process in step S071 is completed, the main loop process in steps S073 to S078 is performed at predetermined time intervals as the process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is repeated.

  In the process of step S072, the CPU 241 refers to the counter value for main loop update period and determines whether or not the main loop update period that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 26) during an effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until this main loop update period arrives (step S072: NO), various effect lottery random numbers are updated (step S079: various effect soft random number update processing).

  When the main loop update period has arrived (step S072: YES), the CPU 241 performs a received command analysis process (step S073). In this received command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read and the effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command is read. I do. Among these effect control commands, the hold addition command, hold subtraction command, variation pattern designation command, decoration symbol designation command, variation stop command, various commands transmitted during a hit game, etc. (for example, jackpot) This includes a start command, a regular winning prize winning command (big winning prize winning commands 1 and 2), an OV winning big winning prize winning command (large winning prize winning commands 3 and 4), a jackpot end command, and the like.

  For example, when at least a variation pattern designation command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command are received and stored in the reception buffer. In the case of command analysis processing, one or more types of effect patterns are determined based on information (variation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The effect pattern determined here works as a “part effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario. Next, determine the time schedule for how and at what timing the production pattern (parts production) determined above will appear, and compose the production scenario. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Various production patterns (part production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing an “production scenario” in a broad sense. Note that the above-described production scenario is rewritten to a different production scenario as necessary (for example, a part production for operation may be incorporated based on operation detection of the frame production button 13). In this case, the changed effect scenario data is reset in the scenario setting area, and an effect appears based on the changed effect scenario data.

  When the received command analysis process in step S073 is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, the time within the variation period (decoration symbol variation period) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is within the same period as the variation period (special symbol variation period) in which the special symbol is variably displayed. On this axis, a time schedule for what kind of production pattern is made to appear in the production means with what time width is managed by this timer. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an effect process related to an LED data update process (step S075) and an effect agent control data update process (step S077) which will be described later. Here, this production scenario timer is monitored, and when the production time of one production comes, the sound data for the speaker 46 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243, respectively. . The LED data for the light display device is created by an LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by an after-mentioned effect actor control data update process (step 077). The

  Next, LED data update processing is performed (step S075). In this LED data update process, LED data for a light display device such as a decorative lamp unit 45 or an LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 26) during a timer interrupt process to be described later.

  Next, sound output processing is performed (step S076). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S074 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

  Next, a production accessory control data update process is performed (step S077). In the effect accessory control data update process, drive control data for the movable accessory motor 97a or the movable accessory motor 98a is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in a director action operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 26) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, noise countermeasure management processing for monitoring malfunction of the sound source LSI or the like is performed (step S078). If the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer expires and the CPU is automatically reset to recover from the runaway state. Thereby, the main loop process is terminated, and the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is performed until the next main loop update period comes.

(12. Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 25)
Next, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing on the effect control side. This command reception interruption process is executed with higher priority than an effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 26) described later when an effect control command is received from the main control unit 20.

  First, when an interruption based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs during execution of the main process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S081). The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S082), and the saved register contents are restored (step S083). Thereby, the command reception interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the effect control unit side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until an interrupt based on the next strobe signal is generated. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, this command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

(13. Production control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 26)
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the timer interrupt process on the production control side will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the effect control-side timer interrupt process. This production control side timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1 ms), and is executed by interruption during execution of the production control side main process.

  In FIG. 26, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S091), and then performs an effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, whether or not an operation (ON operation) detection signal is input from the frame effect button 13 is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. To store. This information is used for the button notice effect.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, when there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S074) in the effect control side main process of FIG. 24, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Thus, image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. Thereby, the image production along the production scenario is realized.

  Next, directing action operation management is performed (step S094). In this production actor operation management, based on the motor control data for the movable object created in the production actor control data update process (step S077), the movable article motor 97a or the movable article through the drive control unit. A control signal is output to the motor 98a. Thereby, the visual production | presentation by the movable body accessory (The clock hand 97 of a clock type accessory, the flower type accessory 98) along a production scenario is implement | achieved.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S095). In this effect LED management, based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075), the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and blinked through the light display control unit. Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, a main loop update process for managing the main loop update period is performed (step S096). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by increment processing, for example.

  After the processing of steps S091 to S096 is completed, the saved register contents are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interruption process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Contents of Received Command Analysis Process: FIGS. 27A to 29B>
FIG. 27A to FIG. 29 show processing closely related to the present invention among the processing executed in the received command analysis processing (step S073 in FIG. 20). In the following, a case where the normal prize winning prize command (large prize winning prize commands 1 and 2) and the OV winning big prize prize winning command (large prize winning prize commands 3 and 4) are received will be described.

<13. Processing for receiving a prize winning command: FIG. 27A to FIG. 29B>
(13-1. Reception process for a regular prize winning command: FIG. 27A and FIG. 27B)
First, with reference to FIG. 27A and FIG. 27B, the received command analysis process when receiving the normal big prize winning command (big winning prize winning commands 1 and 2) will be described in detail.

  FIG. 27A (a) received the “big prize winning command 1” related to the lower prize winning port 40, and FIG. 27B (b) received the “large winning prize command 2” related to the right big prize winning 50. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis process in a case. These special winning opening winning prize commands 1 and 2 are effect control commands transmitted in step S565 of the big winning opening maximum winning number confirming process in FIG. 20 or in step S606 of the large winning opening over winning number confirming process in FIG. is there. It should be noted that since the processing method is similar between the case where the grand prize opening prize command 1 is received and the case where the big prize opening prize command 2 is received, the following description relates to the big prize opening prize command 1 in FIG. The received command analysis process will be described, and the received command analysis process related to the big prize winning prize command 2 will be described while being omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  In FIG. 27A (b), when the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the big prize winning prize command 1, it first determines whether or not there is an error (step S701). If there is an error (step S701: YES), the error type is determined (step S702). If the error type belongs to the first type error (step S702: = first type error), nothing is done. Then, the process exits the process for receiving the winning prize winning command 1 as it is. As a result, when the first type error having a high degree of seriousness is occurring, the big prize opening prize effect at the time of non-over winning (the big prize opening normal prize effect) is not executed. This is because, when a serious error type occurs, error notification is executed with the highest priority by using a sound effect by the speaker 46, a light effect by the decoration lamp 45 / LED, an image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 36, etc. It is because it is preferable to make it. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the first type error is occurring, it is restricted (prohibited) from appearing the big prize opening normal winning effect using the image effect, the light effect, and the sound effect. Yes.

  On the other hand, if the error is not in progress (step S701: NO), or if the error type is not the first type error even in the error (step S701: YES and step S702: ≠ first type error), step S703 Then, the acquired ball number display process is performed (step S703).

  In this acquired ball number display process, a setting process of effect data (acquired ball number display effect data) for displaying the “acquired ball number notification effect” already described is performed. Specifically, in order to update and display the number of acquired balls V when receiving the winning game winning command 1, the current winning prize of the lower prize opening 40 for the acquired number V of balls is displayed. The number of balls (for 13) is added, and the effect data for displaying the added acquired ball number V as a new acquired ball number V is set.

  Further, in this acquired number-of-balls display process, the setting process of the effect data (winning number display effect data) for displaying the “in-round winning number notification effect” described above is performed. Here, effect data for displaying information on the number of winnings to the big winning opening 40 is set. The number of winnings before the over winning to the lower major winning opening 40 during the current round game is counted by the “large winning opening winning command 1 counter” for counting the number of winning. In the present embodiment, every time a winning prize winning command 1 is received, the winning prize winning command 1 receiving process is executed, and the winning prize winning command 1 counter is incremented. Thereby, the production control unit 24 can grasp the number of winnings before the over-winning for the lower large winning opening 40. It should be noted that the number of winnings before the over winning to the right big winning opening 50 in FIG. 27B is grasped by the “large winning opening winning command 2 counter” having the same function as the above-mentioned big winning opening winning command 1 counter (FIG. 27B). Step S713).

  When an error that does not belong to the first type error is present, control may be performed so that an in-error-acquisition display effect appears as in an in-error acquisition display process (step S874 in FIG. 27B) described later.

  The above-mentioned big winning mouth winning command 1 counter or big winning mouth winning command 2 counter counts the number of winnings before the over winning that occurred during 1R. Therefore, when the next round game is started, It will be cleared to zero when receiving a prize opening release command (the 1R is a big hit start command) or a “round end command (at the end of the final round, a big hit end command)” at the end of the current round game. (The same applies to the big prize opening prize commands 3, 4, and 7 counters described later).

  Next, a special winning opening normal winning effect process is performed (step S704). In this big winning opening normal winning presentation processing, the “lower winning prize selection over winning presentation selection table” of FIG. 32 (b) is acquired, and the lower winning prize over winning winning selection selection table is referred to, when the non-over winning prize is obtained. Normal winning effect data (large winning opening normal winning effect data) is set. Based on the effect data set in the process for receiving the winning prize winning command 1 command, the winning prize normal winning effect appears. As a result, the process of receiving the special winning opening prize command 1 is terminated.

(T-12. Grand prize opening over winning effect selection table: FIG. 32 (B), FIG. 33 (B))
With reference to FIG. 32 (b), the above “lower prize winning opening over winning effect selection table” will be described.

  In the lower prize winning opening over winning effect selection table, the number of over winnings during 1R (during this round game) and the big winning opening winning effect to be revealed are defined in association with each other. The big prize opening prize production according to the number of over winning prizes is determined.

  “+0 (None)” in the column of over winning numbers shown in the figure indicates that the maximum winning number has not yet been exceeded and no over winning has occurred, and the maximum winning mouth winning effect corresponding to “+0” is the maximum. It is a large winning opening winning effect mode that can appear until the number of winnings is reached, that is, a “normal winning effect mode at the time of non-over winning (large winning port normal winning effect mode)”. Therefore, in the “big winning opening prize command 1 reception process” shown in FIG. 27A, effect data for making the big winning opening winning effect corresponding to “+0” appear is selected. Note that the “right big prize opening over winning effect selection table” of FIG. 33 (b) is the same as the “lower big prize opening over winning effect selection table” in FIG. 32 (b) described above. 27B is the same as the “Big Winner Award Command 2 Receiving Process” shown in FIG. 27B, as in the Large Winner Entrance Award Command 1 Receiving Process. Production data to be selected is selected.

  On the other hand, when an over-winning occurs, effect data for displaying a large winning opening winning effect (over winning effect) corresponding to the over-winning number is selected (FIG. 32 (b)). Over-winning numbers “+1” to “+2”, see over-winning numbers “+1” to “+3” in FIG. 33B). Note that the received command analysis processing when receiving an OV winning big prize opening winning command at the time of over winning will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28, 29A, and 28B.

  The winning prize winning command 1 receiving process has been described above. However, the “big winning prize winning command 2 receiving process” shown in FIG. 27B when the “big winning prize winning command 2” related to the right winning prize winning 50 winning is received. "Is substantially the same as the above-described winning prize winning command 1 reception process (see steps 711 to S714 in FIG. 27B). However, in the winning prize winning command 2 reception process, when the winning prize normal winning effect data is set in the winning prize normal winning effect process in step S714, the “right winning prize over winning effect” shown in FIG. The difference is that the effect data (effect data corresponding to the over winning number “+0 (none)” here) is set based on the “selection table”.

  If an error occurs in the winning prize winning command 1 receiving process or the winning prize winning command 2 receiving process, regardless of the error type, the winning prize winning effect at the non-over winning prize (normal winning prize normal) (Winning effect) may be configured not to be executed (YES in step S701, the process for receiving the winning prize winning command 1 as it is without doing anything, and the determination in step S711 as being YES, without doing anything). The content of the process may be a process of omitting the reception process of the grand prize winning command 2). This is because most error types execute error notification using a sound effect by the speaker 46, a light effect by the decoration lamp 45 / LED, an image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 36, etc. This is because it is preferable to restrict (prohibit) the appearance of a normal winning opening normal winning effect using a light effect and a sound effect. In addition, the big prize opening normal winning effect is an effect mode for winning balls until the maximum number of winnings is reached, and the player does not get a sense of satisfaction or superiority like when an over winning ball is generated. Therefore, it is considered that there is no particular problem even if the normal winning effect is limited during the error.

(13-2. Receipt Processing of OV Winning Award Winning Command: FIGS. 28 and 29A)
Next, with reference to FIG. 28 and FIG. 29A, the received command analysis processing when receiving the OV winning grand prize opening prize command (large winning prize winning prize commands 3 and 4) will be described in detail.

  FIG. 28 shows a “large prize opening prize command 3” associated with the lower grand prize opening 40 prize, and FIG. 29A shows a received command analysis when the “large prize opening prize command 4” associated with the right major prize opening 50 prize received. It is a flowchart which shows a process. These large winning opening winning prize commands 3 and 4 are effect control commands transmitted in step S607 of the large winning opening winning prize confirmation process of FIG.

(13-2-1. Grand prize opening prize command 3 reception process: FIG. 28)
Referring to FIG. 28, the received command analysis process (large prize opening prize command 3 reception process) when receiving the “large prize opening prize command 3” related to the lower prize winning opening 40 will be described in detail.

  In FIG. 28, when the effect control unit 24 receives the big prize opening prize command 3, it first determines whether or not an error is currently occurring (step 810). If there is an error (step S810: YES), the error type is determined (step S811). If the error type belongs to the first type error (step S811: first type error), nothing is done. Then, the process exits the reception process for the prize winning command 3 as it is. As a result, when a first type error with a high degree of seriousness is occurring, the special winning opening winning effect is limited and error notification is executed with the highest priority.

  On the other hand, if the error is not in progress (step S810: NO), or if the error type is not the first type error even in the error (step S810: YES and step S811: ≠ first type error), step S812 Proceeding to the process, 1 is added to the special winning opening prize command 3 counter (step S812). The special winning prize winning command 3 counter is a counter for counting the number of over winning prizes for the lower major winning entry 40 during 1R (during the current round game). In the present embodiment, every time a winning prize winning command 3 is received, the winning prize winning command 3 receiving process is executed, and the winning prize winning command 3 counter is incremented. Thereby, the production control unit 24 can grasp the number of over winning prizes for the lower large winning opening 40.

  Next, an acquired ball number display process is performed (step S813). This acquired ball number display process is basically the same as the acquired ball number display process in step S703 in FIG. 27A or the acquired ball number display process in step S713 in FIG. 27B. The point which sets the production data for making the related number-of-balls notification effect and OV winning number notification effect appear is different.

  Specifically, as the acquired ball number display effect data, effect data for displaying the acquired ball number V considering the number of winning balls (13) due to over winning as a new acquired ball number V, As the effect data for displaying the “OV winning number notification effect”, the effect data for notifying the information related to the number of over winnings is set based on the value of the big winning mouth winning command 3 counter, For example, effect data for notifying the acquired number of balls U due to over winning is set as effect data for displaying the “acquired number notification effect”. As a result, the second to fourth acquired number-of-balls notification effects as described above appear, and the acquired number-of-balls notification effect related to over winning is realized. In addition, the number U of winning balls due to over winning is added to the current number of winning balls U every time an over winning occurs, that is, every time a winning prize winning command 3 or 4 is received. Is displayed as the number U of acquired balls. When an error that does not belong to the first type error is present, control may be performed so that an in-error-acquisition display effect appears as in an in-error acquisition display process (step S874 in FIG. 27B) described later.

  Next, the current hit type is determined (step S814). If the current hit type is not the 12R long open probability variable big hit (step S814: ≠ 12R long open probability variable), the process proceeds to step S817 described later, and if the 12R long open probability variable big hit (step S814: = 12R). The long open probability change), the big winning opening prize command 3 counter is acquired (step S815).

  Next, a probability change notification lottery process is performed (step S816). In the probability variation notification lottery process, the “probability variation notification lottery” described above is performed. Here, the current number of rounds is confirmed, and a probability variation notification lottery is performed with reference to a “probability variation notification lottery table” (not shown). In the present embodiment, in the case of 1R to 8R, the probability change notification lottery is performed using a predetermined random number for effect lottery.

(T-13. Probability change notification lottery table)
In the probability variation notification lottery table, the number of over-wins (large winning mouth winning command 3 counter value) and the winning probability of the probability variation notifying lottery are determined in association with each other. Winning probability (for example, “over winning + 1 (over winning 1)” is 10%, “over winning + 2 (over winning 2)” is 20%) Yes.

  When the probability variation notification lottery process is completed, it is determined whether or not the probability variation notification lottery has been won (step S817). If the winning change notification lottery is not won (step S817: NO), then an over winning effect setting process is performed (step S819).

  In the above “over winning effect setting process”, as the effect process when the probability change notification lottery is not won (losing), the “lower prize winning port over winning effect selection table” of FIG. Over winning effect data corresponding to the number of over winning (large winning mouth winning command 3 counter value) is set with reference to the winning award over winning effect selection table. Thereby, the over winning effect by the light effect and the sound effect when the over winning is generated at the lower large winning opening 40 is executed. As a result, the process of receiving the special winning opening prize command 3 is exited.

  On the other hand, when the probability variation notification lottery is won (step S817: YES), the probability variation notification effect setting process for setting the probability variation notification effect effect data is performed (step S820). As a result, when the probability variation notification lottery is won, a “probability notification effect” using the clock hand 97 appears. Then, when the probability change notification effect setting process is completed, the large winning award winning command 3 reception process is exited.

(13-2-2. Grand prize opening prize command 4 reception process: FIGS. 29A to 29B)
Next, with reference to FIG. 29A, the received command analysis process (large winning opening winning command 4 receiving process) when receiving the “large winning opening winning command 4” related to the right large winning opening 50 winning will be described in detail. It should be noted that, in the winning prize opening command 4 receiving process, the processing contents substantially the same as those of the above-described winning prize winning command 3 receiving process will be described while being omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  In FIG. 29A, when receiving the special winning opening prize command 4, the effect control unit 24 first determines whether or not an error is currently occurring (step 851). If there is an error (step S851: YES), the process proceeds to “in-error OV winning effect setting process” (step S852). This in-error OV winning effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29B.

  On the other hand, when it is not in error (step S851: NO), that is, when it is “normal”, the following processes of steps S853 to S858 are executed as effect processing related to the over winning effect at the normal time.

  When the processing proceeds to step S853, 1 is added to the special winning opening winning command 4 counter (step S853). The special winning prize winning command 4 counter is a counter that counts the number of over winning prizes for the right big winning entry 50 during 1R (during this round game).

  Next, an acquired ball number display process is performed (step S854). This acquired number-of-balls display process is performed in step S813 of FIG. 28 except that the effect data for displaying the acquired number-of-balls notification effect and the OV winning number notification effect for the right big prize opening 50 is set. Since the processing content is substantially the same as the acquired number-of-balls display processing, detailed description is omitted to avoid duplicate description.

  Next, over winning effect setting processing is performed (step S855). In this over-winning effect setting process, the “right big prize opening over winning effect selection table” of FIG. 33 (b) is acquired, and the over-winning number (large winning award) is referred to with respect to the right big winning port over winning effect selection table. Over-winning effect data corresponding to the (winning winning command 4 counter value) is set. In the present embodiment, when an over winning is generated at the right large winning opening 50, unlike the lower large winning opening 40, in addition to the sound effect and the light effect, a movable body effect using the flower-shaped accessory 98 is executed. (See FIGS. 32 and 33).

  Next, 1 is added to the over-winning ball cumulative number counter (step S856). This over-winning ball cumulative number counter is a counter for counting the cumulative number of over-winning balls for the right big winning opening 50 during the winning game (here, during the big hit game (all round games)). In this embodiment, every time a winning prize winning command 4 is received, the winning prize winning command 4 receiving process is executed, and the over winning ball cumulative number counter is incremented. As a result, the effect control unit 24 can grasp the cumulative number of over winnings for the right big winning opening 50. The over-winning ball cumulative number counter counts the cumulative number of over-winning balls, so that it is cleared to zero when a “hit winning command” is received when the big winning game ends.

  Next, an over-winning cumulative number display process is performed (step S857). In this over-winning cumulative number display process, the “right big prize opening over-winning cumulative number display effect selection table” is acquired, and the over-winning is displayed with reference to the right big winning mouth over-winning cumulative number display effect selection table. Over winning effect data corresponding to the cumulative number (over winning ball cumulative number counter value) is set.

(T-14. Right big prize opening over winning cumulative number display effect selection selection table: FIG. 34)
As shown in FIG. 34, in the right large winning opening over winning cumulative number display effect selection selection table, as shown in FIG. 34, “cumulative number display effect” by the clock hands 97 and the number display unit 80 (number sector 80a). Are determined in association with each other, and specifically, the cumulative number display effect mode according to the cumulative number of over winning prizes is determined. The details of the cumulative number display effect mode have already been described, and will be omitted.

  In the right big winning opening over winning cumulative number display effect selection selection table, “+0 (none)” in the over winning cumulative number column shown in the figure indicates that no over winning has yet occurred. In this case, the cumulative number is displayed. Although the performance does not appear and is not shown, the clock hand 97 and the number sector 80a hold the initial state at the start of the big hit game. Specifically, the clock hand 97 moves to the initial position (in this embodiment, the position where the long hand and the short hand point to 12 o'clock (XII)), and the number sector 80a is turned off or has an initial color of “white”. The light emission mode is maintained.

  On the other hand, when an over-winning has occurred, effect data (over-winning cumulative number effect data) for displaying a cumulative number display effect corresponding to the over-winning cumulative number is selected (FIG. 34). Over-winning cumulative number “+1” to “+13” column). As a result, a “cumulative number display effect” using the clock hands 97 and the number sectors 80a appears in correspondence with the cumulative number of over winning prizes. In the drawing, for the convenience of explanation, details regarding the case of 13 or more (13 to 24) are omitted, the effect mode of the clock hands 97 is abbreviated as “special stepping action”, and the numerical display unit 80 The production mode of (number sector 80a) is abbreviated as “special lighting production (special light production mode)”.

  As described above, when the over-winning cumulative number display processing in step S857 is finished, the large winning opening winning command 4 reception processing is exited.

(13-2-3. OV winning effect setting process during error: FIG. 29B)
Next, the in-error OV winning effect setting process (step S852) in FIG. 29A will be described. FIG. 29B is a flowchart showing details of the in-error OV winning effect setting process in step S852. Here, effect processing relating to an over-winning effect during an error is performed. Note that the same processing contents as those in FIG. 29A will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid redundant description.

  In FIG. 29B, the effect control unit 24 first determines the type of error currently occurring (step S871). If the currently occurring error is a type 1 error (step S871: = type 1 error), nothing is done and the large winning award winning command 4 reception process is left as it is. Thereby, in the case of the first type error, the over winning effect itself is limited (prohibited).

  If the currently occurring error is not the first type error (step S871 ≠ first type error), the process proceeds to step S872, and 1 is added to the big prize winning prize command 4 counter (step S872).

  Next, the number-of-acquisition acquired ball number display process is performed (step S873). This acquired ball number display process has substantially the same processing contents as the acquired ball number display process in step S854 of FIG. 29A. However, the acquired ball number display process in step S854 of FIG. 29A is an effect setting process related to the display of the acquired ball number in the normal state (the effect setting process related to the normal acquired ball number notification effect and the OV winning number notification effect). In this process, the effect setting process related to the display of the number of acquired balls in error is different. In step S854 in FIG. 29A, as a display process of the acquired number of balls V and U in the normal state, the display of the acquired number of balls V and U in the normal state is performed in a predetermined display area at a position and size that is easily visible to the player. The display control is performed so that the error information is displayed. However, in order to preferentially notify the error information, the number of acquired balls V and U is displayed in a retracted position (a retracted display) at a position that does not hinder the error notification. Processing), or the transparency of the acquired number of balls V and U being displayed (normal) is reduced (for example, semi-transparent: transparency control processing), so that error information currently occurring is displayed. Is controlled so as to be easily visible (acquired display effect during error). Here, effect data for displaying the number of acquired balls in error is set. Thereby, the over winning effect by the image effect is realized without interfering with the error notification.

  Next, an over-winning effect setting process in error is performed (step S874). In this error over-winning effect setting process, the “right big prize opening over winning effect selection table” of FIG. 33 (b) is acquired and the right big winning mouth over winning effect selection table is obtained as in the process of step S855. With reference to, over-winning effect data corresponding to the number of over-winnings (large winning mouth winning command 4 counter value) is set. However, here, since there is an error, the effect data relating to the light effect and sound effect shown in the figure. The effect data related to the movable body effect is set without setting. Thereby, the over winning effect by the movable body effect is realized without interfering with the error notification by the light effect and the sound effect.

  Specifically, only the effect data of the flower-shaped combination 98 in the illustrated right big winning opening over winning effect selection table is set. Therefore, if an over-winning occurs even during an error, it can be notified that the over-winning has occurred due to the operation of the flower-shaped accessory 98. Further, in the present embodiment, the flower-shaped accessory 98 operates in the same operation mode as in a normal state, so that the player can easily recognize the occurrence of an overwinning.

  Next, 1 is added to the over-winning ball cumulative number counter (step S875), and an over-winning cumulative number display process during error is performed (step S877).

  In this error over-over winning cumulative number display process, as in step S857, the “right big winning mouth over winning cumulative number display effect selection selection table” of FIG. 34 is acquired, and the right big winning mouth over winning cumulative number display effect is obtained. With reference to the selection table, the over-winning cumulative number effect data corresponding to the over-winning cumulative number is set, but here, since there is an error, the effect data related to the illustrated light effect is not set, and the movable body Production data related to production is set. Thereby, the over winning effect by the movable body effect is realized without interfering with the error notification by the light effect and the sound effect.

  Specifically, only the effect data (effect data related to the movable body effect) of the clock hand 97 of the clock-type accessory in the right large winning opening over winning cumulative number display effect selection table shown in the figure is set. Therefore, even if an error is occurring, the clock hand 97 operates, so that the cumulative number of over winnings can be notified. Further, in the present embodiment, the clock hand 97 operates in the same operation mode as in the normal state, so that the player can easily recognize the over-winning cumulative number.

  In addition, when not using the number display part 80 as an error alerting | reporting means, the effect data (effect data regarding a light effect) of the number display part 80 can also be set. In this case, the same cumulative number display effect mode as that at the normal time appears.

  On the other hand, when the number display unit 80 is used as an error notification unit, if an overwin occurs during an error, the over-winning cumulative number by the number display unit 80 is prevented by the error notification, and the original cumulative number display effect is displayed. Cannot appear immediately. In this case, the following configuration is preferable. When over-winning occurs during an error in regard to the light production in the numerical display unit 80, the production data (the over-winning accumulation display at normal time) of the “right big prize opening over-winning cumulative number display production selection table” in FIG. Effect data) is set in advance, and error notification effect data is preferentially executed during an error. However, in the background, over-winning cumulative display effect data at normal times is internally used. It is controlled so that it does not appear in the appearance. In this case, the movable body effect related to the over-winning effect is already executed during the error notification, and the light effect by the normal number display unit 80 can be immediately executed after the error notification ends. This is preferable because the original cumulative number display effect that should have appeared if no error occurred can be immediately displayed.

  As described above, when the over-in-accumulation cumulative number-of-wins display process in step S877 is completed, the process of receiving the special prize opening prize command 4 is terminated.

(Modification 1)
In the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine having a plurality of types of big winning openings 40 and 50 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the invention is also applicable to a pachinko gaming machine having one big winning opening. (The same applies to second to seventh embodiments described later). For example, when the pachinko gaming machine having one big prize opening is provided with only the right big prize opening 50, the command related to the lower big prize opening 40 and the processing related to the lower big prize opening may be invalidated or eliminated. . Specifically, the process related to the transmission of the grand prize winning command 1, 3 and the big winning prize winning command 1, 3 (for example, the big winning mouth such as during step S565 in FIG. 20 and steps S606 and S607 in FIG. 22). The process related to the winning command 1), the effect control process related thereto (for example, the process of FIG. 27A, the process of FIG. 28, etc.), and the hit type for executing the opening / closing operation of the lower prize winning port 40 and the What is necessary is just to change to suitable processing, such as changing and eliminating the hit game processing concerning. In the case of a pachinko machine equipped with one grand prize opening, the “ordinary big prize opening prize command (big prize opening prize command 1 or 2)” designates at least no over-winning and “OV prize” The “large prize opening prize command (large prize opening prize command 3 or 4)” functions as at least a big prize opening prize command for designating occurrence of an over prize.

[Second Embodiment]
In the above-described embodiment (the first embodiment), the “ordinary winning prize winning command (large winning prize winning command 1, 2)” designates the winning prize type and the occurrence of no over winning, The "Large winning prize winning command (Large winning prize winning command 3, 4)" has been described as specifying the special winning slot type and the occurrence of over winning prizes, but it is possible to specify the number of winning balls corresponding to each big winning mouth. It can be defined as a command. Specifically, the command values of the winning prize winning command 1 to 4 shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and (B) are set to the winning prize type, the presence / absence of occurrence of over winning, and the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning prize opening. Can be defined as a value to specify. In this case, when the production control unit 24 receives any of the special winning opening prize winning commands 1 to 4, a predetermined number (here, 13 winning balls) is determined based on the winning ball number information included in the command. Effect processing (see the acquired number-of-balls display processing in FIGS. 27A to 29A) is performed, and this can be configured to be displayed as the current number of acquired balls V.

[Third Embodiment]
In the above-described embodiment (first embodiment), in order to distinguish the lower prize winning port 40 and the right major prize winning port 50 from the big prize winning prize command, the big winning prize winning command 1 corresponding to the big winning prize type is used. The mode of transmitting ~ 4 has been described. However, in the case where there are a plurality of types of big winning mouths, it is not necessary to distinguish the types of big winning mouths (for example, in the production control unit 24 side, a round game for which one of the big winning mouths is being played. In the case where there is only one winning prize opening itself, the following command transmission form (third embodiment) is adopted. be able to. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a big winning opening over winning number confirmation process according to the embodiment.

  In this third embodiment, paying attention to the point that a winning prize winning command corresponding to the winning prize type is not required, an “acquired ball number command” that allows the number of winning balls to be specified when no over winning is generated. When an over-winning occurs, the “OV winning prize winning command” command for designating the occurrence of an over-winning and the “acquired ball number command” described above are transmitted. This is different from the first embodiment in which a special winning opening winning command corresponding to the special winning opening type is transmitted.

  In FIGS. 39 and 40, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that there is a lower major prize opening 40 and a right major prize opening 50, as in the first embodiment. 39, the processing contents substantially the same as the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process in FIG. 20 and the processing contents substantially the same as the large winning opening over winning number confirmation process in FIG. 22 in FIG. In order to avoid duplication, the description will be omitted while being omitted as appropriate. 39 and 40, the same step numbers are assigned to the processing contents substantially the same as those in FIGS.

(Large winning number maximum winning number confirmation processing according to the third embodiment: FIG. 39)
First, with reference to FIG. 39, the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing according to the present embodiment will be described.

  In FIG. 39, the CPU 201 first sequentially determines the state of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the state of the special electric agent 2 operation flag (steps S561 and S562). If both the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag are in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S561: ≠ 5AH and step S562: ≠ 5AH), this grand prize is done without doing anything. Exit the maximum number of winnings confirmation process.

  When one of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH) (step S561: = 5 AH, or step S561: ≠ 5 AH, and step S562: = 5 AH), It is determined whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the big winning opening (step S563). When no winning is detected at the big winning opening (step S563: NO), nothing is done and the maximum winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process is exited.

  When a winning is detected at the big winning opening (step S563: YES), 1 is added to the big winning opening winning counter corresponding to the big winning opening where the winning is detected (step S564: large winning opening winning counter adding process). Here, when a winning is detected at the lower major winning opening 40, the lower major winning prize winning counter is incremented by 1, and when a winning is detected at the right major winning opening 50, one is added to the right major winning prize winning counter. .

  Next, an acquired ball number command transmission process is performed (step S568). In this acquired ball number command transmission process, an “acquired ball number command” for a winning ball before over winning is transmitted. In the present embodiment, every time there is a winning, a winning ball number command corresponding to a big winning mouth (or a big winning mouth where a winning is detected when there are a plurality of kinds of big winning mouths) is transmitted.

(Acquired ball command: Fig. 41)
In the acquired number-of-balls command, as shown in FIG. 41, the data on the upper byte side (MODE) is a common “BEH” regardless of the winning slot type, and the data on the lower byte side (EVENT) is the prize. It is “XXH (“ XXH ”is a value corresponding to each prize ball number)” that allows the number of balls to be specified. In FIG. 41, “acquired ball number commands 1 to 15” that typically designate 1 to 15 prize balls are shown as the acquired ball number command list.

  In this embodiment, at least the number of winning balls for the big winning opening is different from other winning openings, and the acquired number of balls command corresponding to each winning opening is determined. For example, taking each winning opening according to the first embodiment as an example, when winning at the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, the “acquired ball number command 3 (BE03H ) ”Is also entered at the lower prize opening 40 or the right prize opening 50, the“ acquired ball command 13 (BE0DH) ”for designating 13 prize balls is also awarded at the general prize opening 43. In this case, the “acquired ball number command 13 (BE0AH)” for designating 10 prize balls is designated as “acquired ball number command 0” for designating 0 prize balls when winning the normal symbol starting port 37. (BE00H) "is determined to be transmitted. Of course, among the winning holes, winning holes that do not need to transmit the acquired ball number command can be configured not to transmit the acquired ball number command.

  Therefore, in the acquired ball number command transmission process in step S568, the “acquired ball number command” associated with the big winning opening where the winning is detected is transmitted. Here, when winning the lower major winning opening 40 or the right major winning opening 50, “acquired ball number command 13 (BE0DH))” is transmitted. If the number of prize balls is different between the lower major prize opening 40 and the right major prize opening 50, an acquired ball number command corresponding to each number of winning balls is transmitted.

  During the process of confirming the maximum number of winning prizes according to the present embodiment, an “acquired number of balls command” corresponding to each big winning entry is transmitted for each winning prize until the number of winning prizes at the winning prize reaches the maximum winning number. ('Step S563: YES to S566: NO' processing route). Then, the over winning ball is monitored in the “large winning mouth over winning number confirmation process” of FIG. 40 executed after the big winning mouth is shifted to the closed state (after the big winning mouth closing condition is established). Although details will be described later, when an over-winning occurs, in the large winning-port over-winning number confirmation process, together with the acquired number-of-balls command, an “over-winning big winning mouth winning command ( A big prize opening prize command 7) "is transmitted. Therefore, when the “acquired ball number command” is transmitted alone during a winning game, it is equivalent to designating that no over-winning has occurred.

  The winning ball number command transmitted during the winning game is sent to the winning control unit 24 on the effect control unit 24 side, for example, the above-mentioned winning number notification effect during round, the acquired ball number notification effect, the lower winning prize port 40 or It is used for appearance such as a normal winning opening corresponding to the right large winning opening 50. When the effect control unit 24 receives an acquired number-of-balls command during a winning game, the effect control unit 24 grasps that a winning to the big winning opening has occurred, and every time an acquired number-of-balls command is received, information on the number of winning balls included therein Based on the above, the number of winnings and the number of winning balls are calculated, and the winning number notifying effect and the winning ball number notifying effect during the round can be displayed. It should be noted that the effect control unit 24 is a predetermined effect control command transmitted from the main control unit 20 side during a hit game (during a big hit game or a small hit game), for example, the “big hit (small hit) start command”, “ Based on the winning prize opening command (round start command), “round end command”, “big hit (small hit) end command”, etc., whether the current round Understand how many rounds it is and which open winning prize opening it is, and when receiving the number-of-balls command, appropriately perform the above-mentioned various winning prize winning effects. It can be made to appear.

  When the normal winning command transmission process of step S565 is completed, it is then determined in step S564 whether or not the large winning opening winning counter after the addition process has reached the maximum number of winning (for example, 9) (step). S566). If the maximum number of winnings has been reached (step S566: YES), the special symbol accessory operation timer is cleared (step S567), and the maximum winning number maximum winning number confirmation process is exited, and the maximum number of winnings has not been reached. (Step S566: NO), nothing is done and the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing is exited.

  As described above, when the large winning opening maximum winning number confirming process is completed, the process proceeds to the large winning opening / closing operation setting process in step S552 of FIG.

(Process of confirming the number of winning prizes over the big winning opening according to the third embodiment: FIG. 40)
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the large winning opening over winning number confirmation processing according to the present embodiment will be described.

  40, first, the CPU 201 sequentially determines the state of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the state of the special electric agent 2 operation flag (steps S601 and S602). If both the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag are in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S601: ≠ 5AH and step S602: ≠ 5AH), this grand prize is done without doing anything. Exit the over-winning confirmation process

  When either of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH) (step S601: = 5 AH, or step S601: ≠ 5 AH, and step S602: = 5 AH), It is determined whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the big winning opening (step S603). If no winning (winning ball) is detected at the big winning opening (step S603: NO), nothing is done and the large winning opening over winning number confirmation processing is exited.

  When a winning is detected at the big winning opening (step S603: YES), 1 is added to the big winning opening winning counter corresponding to the big winning opening where the winning is detected (step S604: large winning opening winning counter adding process). Here, when a winning is detected at the lower major winning opening 40, the lower major winning prize winning counter is incremented by 1, and when a winning is detected at the right major winning opening 50, one is added to the right major winning prize winning counter. .

  Next, an acquired ball number command transmission process is performed (step S610). This acquired ball number command transmission process has the same processing contents as the acquired ball number command transmission process (step S568) in the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process of FIG. In the present embodiment, the acquired number-of-balls command (in this case, the acquired number-of-balls command 13) is transmitted regardless of whether or not an overwinning has occurred.

  Next, the special winning opening winning counter is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the counter value exceeds the maximum winning number (step S605). When the big winning opening winning counter does not exceed the maximum winning number (step S605: NO), the large winning opening over winning number confirmation processing is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the winning prize winning counter exceeds the maximum winning number (step S605: YES), an “OV winning prize winning command (big winning prize winning command 7)” for the over winning ball is transmitted. (Step S612: OV winning command transmission process) However, unlike the first embodiment, the “OV winning prize winning command” transmitted here is the lower winning prize port 40 and the right winning prize winning port. 50 is a “big prize opening prize command for OV prize”.

  The OV winning big prize winning command is, for example, the “big winning prize winning command 7” shown in FIG. 41, and the upper byte (MODE) data is the same “FDH” regardless of the big winning prize type. The lower byte (EVENT) data is “7FH” for designating over winning.

  When the “big prize opening prize command 7” is sent, the effect control unit 24 grasps that an over-winning has occurred, and displays an over-winning effect based on this. On the side of the production control unit 24, the “Large Winner Award Command Command 7 Counter” and the “Large Winner Port Award Command 4 Counter” function the same as the “Large Winner Award Command 7 Counter” Counter ") and the above" over winning ball cumulative number counter (counter for counting the cumulative number of over winning balls) ". Thereby, the production control 24 side can grasp the number of over winning prizes and the cumulative number of over winning balls.

  As to which of the big winning mouths 40 and 50 is the over winning prize, as described above, the effect control unit 24 side transmits the “big hit start command” and “round start command” transmitted during the winning game. ”,“ Round End Command ”,“ Big Hit End Command ”, etc., whether the current win type, whether or not the game is hit, whether it is the current round, open state (opening / closing operation) ), It is known which of the big prize winning exits, and when receiving the big winning prize winning command 7, the desired over winning effect is produced according to the special winning prize opening. It can be made to appear. For example, the same effect mode as the over-winning effect that appears by the processing of steps S819 in FIG. 28, steps S855 and S857 in FIG. 29A, and steps S874 and S876 in FIG. 29B can be made to appear.

  In addition, when receiving the winning ball number command 13 and the grand prize winning prize command 7, the effect control unit 24 is based on the information included in the winning prize number notification effect during the round (over winning number display effect). And an acquired ball number notification effect (over winning winning ball number display effect) can be displayed. For example, it is possible to make the same effect appearance appear as the effect appearance appearing by the acquired ball number display processing in step S813 in FIG. 28, step S854 in FIG. 29A, and step S873 in FIG. 29B.

  When the OV winning command transmission process in step S612 is completed, the process exits the large winning opening over winning prize number confirmation process.

  As described above, when the over-winning number confirmation process is exited, the special electric accessory continuation determination process (S509) is exited as it is until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero, that is, until the remaining ball discharge time elapses ( Step S571 of FIG. 21: NO), the large winning opening over winning number confirmation process is repeated. As a result, over-winning balls within the large winning opening effective winning period are monitored.

  In the third embodiment described above, when the over-winning has not occurred from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the “acquired ball number command (first specific value) In the case where only one type of command is transmitted and an over-winning occurs, the “acquired ball number command” and “over-winning generation” are designated. Two types of commands are transmitted: “OV winning prize winning command (second big winning prize command in which a second specific value is determined)”. The third embodiment has the following advantages.

  First, the effect control unit 24 performs relatively simple effect control such that an effect process related to an over winning effect is performed only when an OV winning grand prize winning command (command 7 winning command) is received. In the process, a winning effect related to the big winning opening can be displayed. In this respect, the same effect as in the first embodiment can be obtained.

  Secondly, the number-of-balls command itself is a production control command that is also used when winning other winning ports that are not related to over-winning, and is a versatile command that is related to over-winning. Since it can be used as a command, it is excellent in versatility and convenience. Particularly in the case of this embodiment, the number of winning balls (13 for the large winning openings 40 and 50) is different from the other winning openings (the starting openings 34 and 35 are three, the general winning opening 43). Is 10). Focusing on this point, the “acquired ball command 13” for designating the number of 13 winning balls is a unique winning command related to the big winning mouth, that is, the winning ball number command 13 itself has won a winning prize. It can be made to function as a big winning mouth winning command for designating the effect.

  In this case, there are the following advantages. When the over-winning effect is displayed, the above-mentioned “Large winning mouth winning command 7” is used, and when the over-winning effect other than the over winning effect is displayed, the “acquired ball number command 13” is used. As described above, the effects to be displayed can be separated by using two types of commands, so that the convenience in managing the effect processing is excellent.

  Third, since two types of big prize opening prize commands are transmitted when over-winning, even if one command value is not transmitted correctly due to electrical effects such as noise, the other command Is transmitted correctly, the winning effect related to the big winning opening corresponding to the other command can be displayed. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the fact that no winning effect appears at the time of over winning, except in a very rare case where noise is not correctly transmitted to both commands. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from giving distrust such as “there is no effect even though the prize has been won, it is strange”, “there is no prize effect, or there may have been no payout of the winning ball”, and the like.

  Fourthly, when developing a new model, if you want to change the number of winning balls in the big winning opening, for example, from the 13 winning balls in the lower big winning opening 40 and the right big winning opening 50 of the old model, When it is desired to change the mouth 40 to 13 prize balls and the right big prize opening 50 to 15 prize balls, the command value at the time of the big prize opening prize is changed to the corresponding number command command (in this case, the right big prize mouth 50 The game can be easily changed without changing the program to Yakumo, and the game has excellent compatibility and versatility between old and new models. Machine can be provided.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the above embodiment, an example in which a “probability change notification effect” is provided as an effect that can appear due to an overwinning has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a “special game advance notice effect” as described below can be configured to appear as an effect that can appear due to over winning. Hereinafter, the “special game advance notice effect” will be described in detail.

(Preliminary notice during special games (Pre-order notice during pre-game))
In the present embodiment, at the start of the hit game, there is a new active hold ball than the active hold ball related to the current hit game, and during the big hit game or the small hit game, the change display operation of the special symbol is Since it is not performed (see steps S303 to S304 in FIG. 9), there may be a case where a winning ball number is generated by winning at the starting port during a winning game. If one or more active reserve balls exist at the time of occurrence of an overwinning using such information regarding the active reserve ball, a big win can be won for the active reserve ball due to the occurrence of an overwinning. It is possible to make a special effect (notice effect during special game) such as notifying the sex.

  In other words, the above-mentioned “special game announcement effect” has the same role as the “hold display change system” and “variation start change system” look-ahead notification effect in that it uses information related to the operation holding ball. Although it is an aspect, the pre-reading notice effect of “holding display change system” or “change start time change system” is executed in one or a plurality of symbol change display games when it is determined whether or not the action hold ball is generated. In contrast, the above-mentioned special game advance notice effect is executed when the symbol variation display game is “stopped during 'per game'” (executed on the condition that an overwinning occurs). In that respect, it is different in nature from the pre-reading notice effect.

  In the above-mentioned special game announcement effect, for example, there is a possibility that there is an operation holding ball related to the big hit win in the existing operation holding balls (in-hold winning confirmation notification), or there may be an operation holding ball related to the big win winning. It can be set as the production aspect which can alert | report that there exists (on-hold winning expectation degree). In addition, when it is set as the production content that suggests the winning expectation degree in the hold, if there is an operation holding ball related to the big hit winning, an effect mode that suggests that the winning expectation degree in the hold is relatively high appears. When there is no operation holding ball related to the jackpot winning, it is possible to present an effect mode that suggests that the winning expectation degree within holding is relatively low. In addition, the special game advance notice effect includes, for example, an image display effect (for example, a hold display change effect according to the on-hold winning expectation), a sound effect, a light effect, and a movable body effect. You can make it appear.

  Note that the jackpot lottery probability may vary before and after the jackpot game. For example, when winning a promising big hit in the normal gaming state, the low probability state is before the big hit game, but after the big hit game, the high probability state is entered. In addition, during the big hit game, it is once shifted to a low probability state (see S475 in FIG. 15A described above), and an operation holding ball is generated during the big hit game. When a pre-reading decision is made, a winning lottery is performed in a low probability state, and a winning lottery is generated in a high probability state at the start of fluctuation. There is also a risk of contradiction.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the time of over-winning, it is determined whether the lottery probability state after the end of the big hit game is a high probability or a low probability according to the big hit type won this time, and the action holding ball that existed before the big hit game and It is configured to make a pre-reading determination for the new action-holding ball in the big hit game in the lottery probability state after the end of the big hit, and the pre-read determination result information is included in the production control command, and the production control unit 24 side Send. Thereby, the production | presentation control part 24 side can grasp | ascertain whether the existing operation holding ball is a big hit winning hold.

  In the effect control related to the special game notice effect, first, when the effect control command including the above-mentioned prefetch determination result information is transmitted from the main control unit 20 side to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives this, Know which of the existing active hold balls is a big hit win hold. When the “OV winning prize winning command” transmitted at the time of over-winning is received, the “special game notice effect lottery” is executed, and the “special game notice effect” is executed based on the lottery result. To appear.

  Also, in the case of a gaming machine that always shifts to a high probability state after winning the jackpot game, for example, a so-called “multiplied probability changing machine (ST machine)” in which the probability variation state continues up to the ST specified number of times of 108 times) In the prefetch determination, it is possible to perform the prefetch determination on the assumption of a high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, specific game information that is useful to the player is notified by the notice effect during the special game, so that, as in the case of the probability change notification effect, the player is actively aiming for an overwinning, It is possible to prevent the hit game from appearing as a digestion game. In addition, as the specific game information, if game information indicating whether or not there is a possibility of winning a big hit win can be notified in advance in the existing operation holding ball, the winning prize is given to the player due to the occurrence of an overwin. Not only can it give a sense of superiority due to the increase in the number of balls, but it can also greatly enhance the expectation of winning in a hold and the expectation of an instant villa due to a win in hold. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning game from becoming monotonous and to greatly improve the interest of the winning game (the fun of the game due to over winning).

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the large winning opening having the same function is described in which one of the large winning openings is controlled to open and close according to the hit type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to the following game-playing pachinko gaming machines. This will be described below. In addition, about the same content as the said 1st Embodiment, in order to avoid duplication description, it abbreviate | omits suitably and demonstrates.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, it is known that a game ball gives a right (for example, a probable change state) to shift to a game state advantageous to a player by passing a specific area of a winning device. For example, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-13586: Paragraphs 0067, 0074, FIG. 11), as a special variable winning device, a special variable winning device including a normal big prize opening (normal attacker), And a special variable winning device having a special prize opening (V attacker) in which the specific area is formed. This type of pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “gaming machine with a probability variation determination device”.

  As a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, an embodiment applied to the above-mentioned “game machine with probability variation determination device” will be described. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the hit types that are subject to the big hit lottery on the special figure 1 side are “12R normal big hit” and “12R special big hit”, and the hit type that is the big hit lottery subject on the special figure 2 side is It is assumed that it is a “16R special jackpot”. The jackpot lottery probability is 1/398 when the probability is low, and 1/60 when the probability is high. The symbol lottery probability of “12R normal jackpot” and “12R special jackpot” on the side of the special figure 1 is 96/200, respectively. (48%), 104/200 (52%), and “16R special big hit” on the special figure 2 side is 100%. However, the present invention is not limited to the above jackpot type or jackpot lottery probability, and one or a plurality of non-probable variation jackpot types and latent probability jackpot types can be provided as long as the effects of the present invention can be achieved. The configuration of the game board (arrangement configuration of game parts) will be described as being the same as the embodiment already described (see FIG. 2).

  Here, the lower major prize opening 40 functions as the normal attacker, and the right major prize opening 50 is formed as a major prize opening that functions as the V attacker.

  The right big prize opening 50 includes a “specific area detection switch” for detecting a game ball that has passed (winned) the specific area, and a “non-specific area detection switch” for detecting a game ball that has passed the non-specific area. When a game ball passes through any of the areas, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

  In addition, a distribution member (distribution means) (not shown) is formed inside the right grand prize winning opening 50, and a game ball that has entered the right big prize winning opening 50 by this distribution member is stored in the specific area or It can be assigned to any non-specific area. The operation in which the distribution member guides the game ball to the specific area side is referred to as “V winning operation”, and the period is referred to as “V winning induction period”. On the other hand, the operation of guiding the game ball to the non-specific area side is referred to as “normal winning operation”, and the period is referred to as “normal winning induction period”. The operation control of the distribution member is controlled by the “distribution control means” in which the main control unit 20 assumes the function unit.

  If the player cannot pass the specific area in the right big winning opening 50, the game is shifted to the “normal game state without time saving (normal state)”. It has become so. Note that even if the game ball passes through the non-specific area, the probability change state is not shifted. The transition control to the probability variation state is controlled by “probability variation transition determination control means” which the main control unit 20 takes on as a function unit. The probability variation transition determination control means performs transition control to the probability variation state based on the detection information of the specific area detection switch.

  First, the winning game by each big hit and the gaming state after the winning game according to the present embodiment will be described.

(About 50-1. “12R normal big hit”)
In the case of winning the “12R normal jackpot”, in the jackpot game, for example, a round game in which the lower big prize opening 40 is opened and closed with the first opening / closing pattern from the 1R to the 5th R is executed (hereinafter referred to as the lower big prize opening). The round in which 40 is opened is referred to as a “normal round”), and a round game in which the right big prize opening 50 is opened and closed with the second opening / closing pattern is executed in the 6th round (hereinafter, the right big prize opening 50 is opened). A round game in which the lower major winning opening 40 is opened and closed again in the first opening pattern is executed from the 7th to 12th rounds.

(About the first opening and closing pattern)
The “first opening / closing pattern” related to the normal round is a long opening pattern in which the maximum opening time of the lower large winning opening 40 is set to “29.8 seconds” of the “long opening time”.

(About the second open / close pattern)
The “second opening / closing pattern” related to the special round is to open the right big prize opening 50 until a predetermined time (here, 8 seconds) elapses, and after the opening time (8 seconds) elapses, The opening / closing pattern is such that the right big prize opening 50 is closed. In other words, the second opening / closing pattern is a V-attacker opening / closing operation pattern of “open state for 8 seconds after starting round game → closed state” (special round game (first special game in which second opening / closing pattern is executed) Round games)).

  After closing the right prize opening 50, the remaining ball discharge time (here, the longer 4.98 seconds is assumed due to the internal structure of the right prize opening) and the interval time before opening (20 ms) have elapsed. Later, the game is shifted to the next round game (the same applies to the 12R / 16R special jackpot described later).

(About the operation of the sorting member)
Here, the operation of the sorting member during the big hit game is as follows. First, when a special round game is started, first, a “V winning operation” is executed for a predetermined time (here, 0.02 seconds), and then a “normal winning operation” is performed for a predetermined time (here, 9.98 seconds). After that, the operation of executing the “V winning operation” again for 10 seconds and returning to the normal winning operation is performed again. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a V prize induction period and a V prize non-induction period such as “0.02 second V prize induction period → 9.98 second normal prize induction period → 10 seconds V prize induction period” are created. Yes. During each big hit game, the operation of the sorting member is controlled to the same operation mode.

  In the “12R regular big hit”, the right big prize opening 50 is opened for 8 seconds after the start of the special round game, but the distribution member performs the “V prize winning operation” so as to synchronize with the opening of the right big prize opening 50. Only 0.02 seconds are executed, and immediately shifts to the “normal winning operation” for 9.98 seconds. Therefore, in the case of 12R normal big hit, even if a game ball enters the right big prize opening 50, it is almost impossible to pass to a specific area. As a result, even if the 12R normal big hit is won, the transition to the probable change state cannot be expected. However, even if the specific area is closed, the non-specific area has a time for winning a game ball for 8 seconds, so that a winning ball can be obtained by winning the right big prize opening 50. . For this reason, in the special round game related to the 12R normal jackpot, it is difficult or impossible to acquire the “V prize” by passing through the specific area, but it is a round game such as “I cannot expect a V prize or a prize ball”. Rather, a special round game is performed so that at least a prize ball can be obtained. For this reason, the special round related to the 12R normal jackpot is meaningful.

(About 50-2. “12R special jackpot”)
In the case of winning the “12R special jackpot”, in the jackpot game, for example, from the 1R to the 5R, the “normal round game” in which the lower major winning opening 40 is opened / closed by the first opening / closing pattern is executed, and the 6Rth A special round game is executed in which the right big prize opening 50 is opened and closed with a 'third opening and closing pattern' different from the second opening and closing pattern, and the lower big prize opening 40 is again in the 7th to 12th rounds. A round game that is opened and closed in the first opening pattern is executed. The 12R special jackpot is different from the special round game operation of the 12R normal jackpot.

(About the third open / close pattern)
The “third open / close pattern” related to the special round means that the right big prize opening 50 is closed until a predetermined time (here, 10 seconds) elapses, and after the closing time (10 seconds) has elapsed, The big winning opening 50 is opened for a predetermined time (here, 10 seconds), and after the opening time (10 seconds) has elapsed, the right big winning opening 50 is closed. That is, the third opening / closing pattern is a V-attacker opening / closing operation pattern of “closed state for 10 seconds after starting round game → open state for 10 seconds → closed state” (special round game in which the third open / close pattern is executed) (Second special round game)).

  In this “12R special jackpot”, the right grand prize opening 50 is closed for 10 seconds after the start of the special round game, and then the right big prize opening 50 is opened for 10 seconds, so the right big prize opening 50 is opened. At the same time, the distribution member executes a “V winning operation” for 10 seconds to create a “V winning induction period”. That is, since the open state period of the right big prize opening 50 and the V prize induction period by the sorting member overlap for a long time (in this embodiment, both periods coincide with each other for 10 seconds), the right big prize opening It is assumed that winning to 50 and passing to a specific area are very easy. Unless the player intentionally stops the launch of the game ball or hits the left flow path 3b side, the “V winning” Is certain. As a result, when the 12R special big hit is won, it is possible to easily shift to the probable change state.

(About 50-3. “16R special jackpot”)
When the above “16R special jackpot” is won, in the jackpot game, from 1R to 12R, the operation mode is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot game operation by 12R special jackpot, and from 13R to 15R A “normal round game” is executed in which the special winning opening 40 is opened / closed in the first opening / closing pattern, and a “special round game” in which the right big winning opening 50 is opened / closed in the third opening / closing pattern is executed in the 16th round. It has come to be. Therefore, in the case of this 16R special big hit, since two special round games that are opened and closed with the above third opening / closing pattern are executed, it is considered very easy to win the right big prize opening 50 and to the specific area. Is more reliable. Thereby, when a 16R special big hit is won, it is possible to shift to a probable change state very easily.

  In case of transition to the probability change state, the probability change state of the ST specified number of times is given, and if the big hit is not won during this probability change state, or even if the big hit is won, the specified area cannot be passed The probability change state is terminated and the normal game state is entered.

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, a specific area and a non-specific area are formed inside the V attacker, and the open / close operation pattern of the V attacker includes a long open pattern and a short open pattern. There are two types of open patterns. In this long release pattern, the V attacker is opened for a long time, and the game ball is configured to easily pass through a specific area formed therein. On the other hand, in the short release pattern, the V-attacker is released only for a short time (for example, a maximum of 0.3 seconds), and it is very difficult not only to win a specific area of the game ball but also to make a normal win (patent) Reference 1, paragraphs 0067, 0074, FIG. 11). That is, the round game in which the V attacker is opened in a short opening pattern is substantially meaningless.

  However, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the relationship between the large winning opening opening / closing operation of the first opening pattern to the third opening pattern and the operation mode of the allocating member is well controlled to prevent winning in a specific area. Even in a special round related to such a big jackpot, at least a prize ball can be obtained, and it is possible to bring a profit to the player. The special round is meaningful for players.

  In this embodiment, in the special round game related to the big hit game (first special game) by the normal big hit (first special game) and the big hit game (second special game) by the special big hit, the distribution members are controlled by a common operation pattern. Therefore, the ease of passing through the specific area of the game ball is determined by the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door of the special winning opening. Thereby, it is possible to control the passage of the game ball through the specific area while reducing the control load of the game machine.

  Also, in the second opening / closing pattern related to the normal jackpot, the V-attacker is in an open state during the normal winning induction period, so that it is impossible for the game ball to win V, but a certain amount of game balls are on the non-specific area side. It is possible to win a prize. As a result, it is possible to obtain a prize ball even during the special round, and it is possible to bring a profit to the player even in the special round game with the second opening / closing pattern for the purpose of preventing the winning in the specific area (V winning). it can.

  Also, in this embodiment, in the special round game related to the big hit, the V-attacker is opened at a time partially overlapping with the first V-winning induction period (0.02 seconds) that arrives, and the possibility of V-winning is determined. A little left. In addition, since the open state is shifted to the closed state before the long V winning induction period (10 seconds) that comes after that starts, there is no possibility of V winning. As a result, accidental V-winning does not occur, and clear playability can be achieved.

  In the third opening / closing pattern related to the special jackpot, the V-attacker is kept closed during the first normal winning induction period (9.98 seconds) after the start of the special round game. Be limited. Meanwhile, an effect (a specific region winning instruction effect) for prompting the player to win a specific area is executed so that the player can calmly aim for a V prize.

(50-4. Over-winning production)
In the gaming machine with a probability variation determination device according to the present embodiment, as described above, the “normal round” in which the lower major prize opening is opened and the “special round” in which the right major prize opening 50 is opened according to the number of rounds. Is executed. Here, when an over winning is generated at the lower university winning opening 40, as in the case described in the above embodiment, refer to the “lower university winning opening over winning effect selection table” shown in FIG. The effect data corresponding to the number of over winning prizes (+0 to +3) is set, and thereby the over winning effect corresponding to the lower large winning opening 40 can be displayed. In addition, when an over-winning occurs in the right big winning opening 50, referring to the “right big winning opening over winning effect selection table” shown in FIG. 33 (b), the effect data corresponding to the number of over winning (+0 to +3). Thus, an over winning effect corresponding to the right big winning opening 50 can be displayed.

  With reference to FIG. 37, the over winning effect of the gaming machine with the probability variation determination device of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an over-winning effect according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 37, in the case of the big hit game by “12R normal big hit”, the 1R to 5R and 7R to 12R are “normal round games in which the lower big prize opening 40 is opened and closed”. As the winning effect, an over winning effect by “sound effect and light effect” can appear (refer to FIG. 32 (b), “1R to 5R” and “7R to 12R” columns in FIG. 37). Since the 6R-th is a “special round game in which the right grand prize opening 50 is opened”, “sound production, light production, and movable body production” can appear (FIG. 33 (b), “6R” in FIG. 37). ”Column). In the special round game by the “second opening / closing pattern” executed on the 6th R, an opening / closing pattern may be executed so that the number of winnings in the right big winning opening 50 does not reach the maximum number of winnings, An open / close pattern that may cause an overwinning may be executed.

  Also, in the case of a big hit game with “12R special big hit”, the 1R-5th eyes and the 7th-12th rounds are “normal round games where the lower big prize opening 40 is opened and closed”. Over-winning effects by “effects and light effects” can appear (see FIG. 32 (b), “1R-5R” and “7R-12R” columns in FIG. 37). Since the 6R-th is a “special round game in which the right grand prize opening 50 is opened”, “sound production, light production, and movable body production” can appear (FIG. 33 (b), “6R” in FIG. 37). ”Column). In the special round game by the “third opening / closing pattern” executed on the 6th R, an opening / closing pattern may be executed so that the number of winnings in the right big winning opening 50 does not reach the maximum number of winnings, An open / close pattern that may cause an overwinning may be executed.

  In the case of a big hit game with “16R special big hit”, the 1st to 12th rounds are the same as the above-mentioned “12R special big hit”. Since the 13th to 15th Rs are 'normal round games in which the lower grand prize opening 40 is opened and closed', an over winning effect by "sound effect and light effect" can appear (Fig. 32 (b), Fig. 37). (See column “13R-15R”). Since the 16R-th is a “special round game in which the right big prize opening 50 is opened”, “sound production, light production, and movable body production” can appear (FIG. 33 (b), “16R” in FIG. 37). ”Column).

  In the present embodiment, the same process as in the first embodiment can be performed for an over-winning effect in error. Here, since the movable body accessory is used for the over-winning effect generated during the special round game, the decoration lamp 45, during a specific error type (second type error and / or third type error), When an error notification is executed by the speaker 46, the liquid crystal display device 36, etc., and an overwinning occurs during the error notification, regardless of the error, a flower-shaped accessory 98 or a clock-type accessory (numerical display unit 80) , The clock hands 97) are operated in the same manner as in the normal state, and the over winning effect is executed. Thereby, an effect similar to that of the first embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which an over-winning effect can occur for each jackpot game has been described, but it may be configured to determine whether or not the over-winning effect can be performed according to the type of jackpot. For example, an over winning effect can be generated only for a 16R special jackpot.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the description has been given assuming that the maximum number of winnings is the same (for example, 9) regardless of the winning type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum number of winnings can be different depending on the type of winning.

  For example, as in the first embodiment, a hit type for executing a round game with a short release pattern (for example, 2R short open latent big hit, 2R short open non-probable big hit, small hit A, small hit B, etc.) As shown above, it is not a hit type for which it is unlikely that an over-winning can occur, but an over-winning may occur, but a hit type for executing a round game with a long open pattern (for example, 5R long open positive change large hit, 5R long open) Non-probable big hit, 12R long open non-probable big hit, 12R long open probable big hit, or 16R long open probable big hit, etc.) The maximum number of winnings can be determined to be the maximum number of winnings less than the type of winning per round game of the long open pattern (for example, Five short open pattern side of the former may be defined latter long open pattern side and nine).

  Thereby, even in the hit type for executing the round game with the short open pattern, it is possible to increase the chance of occurrence of an over winning, and accordingly, it is possible to increase the execution probability of the over winning effect. For example, if the maximum number of winnings is the same, even if the winning types have different rates of occurrence of over winnings, by varying the maximum winning number according to the winning type as in this embodiment, in any winning type Also, the occurrence rate of over-winning can be set to the same occurrence rate.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment, a description has been given of a mode in which the maximum number of winnings differs according to the winning type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the type of winning, the maximum winning number itself is determined to be “the same (for example, the maximum winning number is 9 in all round games)”. The number of winnings can be different depending on the round game form and / or the number of rounds. In other words, the number of winning balls exceeding the original maximum number of winnings (9) is not treated as an over winning ball uniformly, but “virtually determined maximum winning number ( (Hereinafter referred to as “pseudo maximum number of winnings”) ”, and a winning ball exceeding the pseudo maximum winning number may be treated as an over winning ball and an over winning effect may be displayed.

  Specifically, in each round game in the winning game, the maximum number of winnings that is a condition for closing the big winning opening is set to a uniform predetermined number (for example, 9), but a round game with a short opening pattern is executed. In the case of a winning game, the pseudo maximum winning number is set to a winning number (for example, five) smaller than the original maximum winning number (9). If there is a prize exceeding the pseudo maximum prize number, an over-winning effect is displayed as an over-winning has occurred. In the case of a hit type in which a round game related to the long open pattern and a round game related to the short open pattern are mixed (for example, in the case of 12R non-probable large hit game), the round game related to the short open pattern is executed. The number of rounds can be set to a smaller number of winnings than the original maximum number of winnings (9). The pseudo maximum winning number can be determined as appropriate.

  In particular, when the round game according to the short open pattern as in the first embodiment is a game form in which the round game is ended without almost winning the game ball, the pseudo maximum winning number is set to, for example, “ If it is set to “0” and even one game ball is won, it can be treated as an over-winning ball. Thereby, even during the round game in which the short opening pattern is executed, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to generate an over-winning effect, and it is possible to give pleasure to aim for the over winning in the round game related to the short opening pattern. In addition, the occurrence of an over-winning effect during a round game with a short opening pattern that is difficult to win can give the player a sense of satisfaction and superiority, so that the fun during the winning game can be further increased.

  Regarding the pseudo maximum winning number focusing on such a round game form, “the pseudo maximum winning number of the round game related to the first opening pattern (corresponding to the short opening pattern) <the second opening set for a longer time than that” It can be configured to satisfy the relationship of “the maximum number of winnings in a round game related to a pattern (open pattern set longer than the first open pattern: equivalent to a long open pattern)”.

  In addition, the pseudo maximum winning number may be determined according to the winning type. For example, the winning type round game of the long open pattern is set to the original maximum winning number (9), and the short open pattern round game is executed. It is possible to set the pseudo maximum winning number related to the winning type to a smaller number of winnings (5). In the case of a hit type in which a round game related to the long open pattern and a round game related to the short open pattern are mixed (for example, in the case of 12R non-probable large hit game), the total number of round games related to the long open pattern is executed. In consideration of the number of rounds and the total number of rounds in which the round game related to the short opening pattern is executed, it is possible to determine whether to determine the original maximum winning number or a pseudo winning number less than that. For example, in the case of 12R non-probable big hit, the total number of rounds in which the round game related to the long open pattern is executed is larger (the long open pattern side is 1 to 10R in total 10 rounds, the short open pattern side is 11 to 11 It is preferable to determine the original maximum winning number (9) for a total of 2 rounds of 12R.

  As for the pseudo maximum winning number paying attention to such a winning type, “the first winning pattern round game is executed, the maximum winning number related to the winning type (original maximum winning number) <the second opening pattern round game is executed. "Pseudo Maximum Winning Number for Winning Type" or "Pseudo Maximum Winning Number for Winning Type of First Opening Pattern Round Game <Maximum Winning Number for Winning Type of Round Game of Second Opening Pattern ( It can be configured to satisfy the relationship of “original maximum number of winnings)”.

  If the main control unit 20 has received a prize exceeding the pseudo maximum number of winnings, an OV winning big prize opening command may be transmitted to the effect control unit 24. From the viewpoint of development (compatibility with old models, versatility, etc.), the main control unit 20 side does not determine whether or not the pseudo maximum winning number has been exceeded, and determines the number of winnings on the production control unit 24 side. It is preferable to configure such that an over-winning effect appears when the counter is counted (see, for example, step S813 in FIG. 28, S853 in FIG. 29A, etc.) and the maximum number of winnings is exceeded. The determination of the round game form, the number of rounds, and the winning type in which the pseudo maximum winning number is used is determined by a predetermined effect control command transmitted from the main control unit 20 side during the winning game, for example, the above-mentioned “big hit (small hit) start” Based on information such as "command", "big prize opening command (round start command)", "round end command", "big hit (small hit) end command" (information based on current hit type and current round number, etc.) Thus, the production control unit 24 may make a unique determination.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine (bullet ball gaming machine) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and gaming machines to which the present invention can be applied (for example, enclosed gaming machines, revolving gaming machines, etc.) ) Is not particularly limited.

  The present invention is useful for a game machine using a game ball or a game medium corresponding thereto.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame,
3 Game board,
3a gaming area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guide rail,
6 Glass door,
7 Front operation panel
8 Upper tray unit,
9 Top saucer,
11 Ball rental button,
12 Card return button,
13 Frame production button,
14 Ball release button,
15 Launch control handle,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 Main control unit,
21 External terminal board for frame,
24 production control unit,
28 Launch control board,
29 payout control board,
32 launcher,
34 Upper starting port,
34a Upper start sensor,
35 Lower starting port,
35a Lower start sensor,
36 liquid crystal display devices,
37 Normal design starting port,
37a Normal design start sensor,
38a, 38b Special symbol display device,
40, 50 Big prize opening,
41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
42,52 Special variable prize device,
42a, 52a Big prize opening sensor,
42b, 52b open door,
42c, 52c
43 General prize opening,
43a General prize opening sensor,
44 Windmill,
45 Decorative lamp,
45a optical display device,
46 speakers,
46a sound generator,
47 Movable wing pieces,
48 Center decoration,
49 Out mouth,
72 Replenishment detection sensor,
73 ball counting sensor,
74 Dispensing motor,
80 The first movable body accessory,
98 second movable object,
97a, 98a Movable body accessory motor,
97b, 98b position detection sensor,
99 Fraud detection sensor 201 Main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 Production control CPU,
242 Production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (1)

A large winning means formed in a game area and configured to execute a closed state in which entry of a game ball is difficult or impossible and an open state that facilitates entry of the game ball;
Main control means for comprehensively controlling gaming operations;
Production means for performing production related to the game,
Based on a control command from the main control means, an effect control means for controlling execution of the effect in the effect means,
In a ball game machine equipped with
The main control means includes
Based on the detection information by the ball detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the big winning means, the number-of-balls counting means for counting the game balls that have entered the big winning means,
Lottery means for executing a lottery regarding whether or not to win,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, the large winning means is set until the number of game balls counted by the number-of-balls counting means reaches the prescribed number of entered balls within a range not exceeding a predetermined prescribed time. Special game control means configured to be controllable to an open state;
Command transmission means for transmitting a predetermined control command based on the counting result by the number of entering balls,
The command transmission means includes
When the counting result is less than or equal to the prescribed number of balls, the control command for normal winning that defines the first specific value is transmitted as the control command, while the counting result exceeds the prescribed number of balls entered. In some cases, the control command includes a command transmission means for transmitting an over winning control command defining a second specific value,
The production control means includes
Upon receiving the normal winning control command, a normal winning effect control means for performing execution control of a normal winning effect for notifying information relating to the occurrence of a pitch less than or equal to the specified number of balls,
Upon receiving the over-winning control command, special winning effect control means for executing and controlling an over-winning effect for notifying information on the occurrence of an over-winning exceeding the prescribed number of balls,
A ball game machine characterized by that.

Images